1gm(1)                       General Commands Manual                      gm(1)
2
3
4
5       NAME
6
7              gm  - command-line utility to create, edit, compare, convert, or
8              display images
9
10

SYNOPSIS

12       gm animate [ options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ]
13
14       gm batch [ options ... ] [ script ]
15
16       gm benchmark [ options ... ] subcommand
17
18       gm compare [ options ... ] reference-image [ options ... ]  compare-im‐
19       age [ options ... ]
20
21       gm  composite  [  options  ... ] change-image base-image [ mask-image ]
22       output-image
23
24       gm conjure [ options ] script.msl [ [ options ] script.msl ]
25
26       gm convert [ [ options ... ] [ input-file ...  ] [ options ... ] ] out‐
27       put-file
28
29       gm display [ options ... ] file ...  [ [options ... ]file ... ]
30
31       gm identify file [ file ... ]
32
33       gm import [ options ... ] file
34
35       gm mogrify [ options ... ] file ...
36
37       gm  montage  [  options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ] output-
38       file
39
40       gm time subcommand
41
42       gm version
43

DESCRIPTION

45       GraphicsMagick's gm provides a suite of utilities for creating, compar‐
46       ing,  converting, editing, and displaying images.  All of the utilities
47       are provided as sub-commands of a single gm executable.   The  gm  exe‐
48       cutable  returns  the exit code 0 to indicate success, or 1 to indicate
49       failure:
50
51       animate displays an animation (e.g. a GIF file) on any workstation dis‐
52       play running an X server.
53
54       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
55       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
56       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
57       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
58
59       benchmark executes one of the other utility commands (e.g. convert) for
60       a specified number of iterations, or execution time, and reports execu‐
61       tion time and other profiling  information  such  as  CPU  utilization.
62       Benchmark provides various operating modes including executing the com‐
63       mand with a varying number of threads, and alternate reporting  formats
64       such as comma-separated value (CSV).
65
66       compare compares two images and reports difference statistics according
67       to specified metrics and/or outputs an image with a visual  representa‐
68       tion  of  the  differences.   It may also be used to test if images are
69       similar within a particular range and  specified  metric,  returning  a
70       truth value to the executing environment.
71
72       composite  composites images (blends or merges images together) to cre‐
73       ate new images.
74
75       conjure interprets and executes scripts in the  Magick  Scripting  Lan‐
76       guage (MSL).
77
78       convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
79       with the same or differing image format  while  applying  an  arbitrary
80       number of image transformations.
81
82       display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
83       play facility. It can display an image on any workstation display  run‐
84       ning an X server.
85
86       identify  describes the format and characteristics of one or more image
87       files. It will also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.
88
89       import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
90       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
91       screen, or any rectangular portion of the screen.
92
93       mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
94       include image scaling, image rotation, color reduction, and others. The
95       transmogrified image overwrites the original image.
96
97       montage creates a composite by combining several separate  images.  The
98       images  are tiled on the composite image with the name of the image op‐
99       tionally appearing just below the individual tile.
100
101       time executes a subcommand and reports the user, system, and total exe‐
102       cution time consumed.
103
104       version  reports  the  GraphicsMagick  release version, maximum sample-
105       depth, copyright notice, supported features, and the options used while
106       building the software.
107
108       The GraphicsMagick utilities recognize the following image formats:
109
110
111       Name  Mode Description
112        o  3FR       r-- Hasselblad Photo RAW
113        o  8BIM      rw- Photoshop resource format
114        o  8BIMTEXT  rw- Photoshop resource text format
115        o  8BIMWTEXT rw- Photoshop resource wide text format
116        o  APP1      rw- Raw application information
117        o  APP1JPEG  rw- Raw JPEG binary data
118        o  ART       r-- PF1: 1st Publisher
119        o  ARW       r-- Sony Alpha DSLR RAW
120        o  AVS       rw+ AVS X image
121        o  BIE       rw- Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
122                         interchange format
123        o  BMP       rw+ Microsoft Windows bitmap image
124        o  BMP2      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v2
125        o  BMP3      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v3
126        o  CACHE     --- Magick Persistent Cache image format
127        o  CALS      rw- Continuous Acquisition and Life-cycle
128                         Support Type 1 image
129        o  CAPTION   r-- Caption (requires separate size info)
130        o  CIN       rw- Kodak Cineon Format
131        o  CMYK      rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
132                         samples (8 or 16 bits, depending on
133                         the image depth)
134        o  CMYKA     rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and
135                         matte samples (8 or 16 bits, depending
136                         on the image depth)
137        o  CR2       r-- Canon Photo RAW
138        o  CRW       r-- Canon Photo RAW
139        o  CUR       r-- Microsoft Cursor Icon
140        o  CUT       r-- DR Halo
141        o  DCM       r-- Digital Imaging and Communications in
142                         Medicine image
143        o  DCR       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
144        o  DCX       rw+ ZSoft IBM PC multi-page Paintbrush
145        o  DNG       r-- Adobe Digital Negative
146        o  DPS       r-- Display PostScript Interpreter
147        o  DPX       rw- Digital Moving Picture Exchange
148        o  EPDF      rw- Encapsulated Portable Document Format
149        o  EPI       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
150                         Interchange format
151        o  EPS       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
152        o  EPS2      -w- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
153        o  EPS3      -w- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
154        o  EPSF      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
155        o  EPSI      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
156                         Interchange format
157        o  EPT       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript with MS-DOS
158                         TIFF preview
159        o  EPT2      rw- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
160                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
161        o  EPT3      rw- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
162                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
163        o  EXIF      rw- Exif digital camera binary data
164        o  FAX       rw+ Group 3 FAX (Not TIFF Group3 FAX!)
165        o  FITS      rw- Flexible Image Transport System
166        o  FRACTAL   r-- Plasma fractal image
167        o  FPX       rw- FlashPix Format
168        o  GIF       rw+ CompuServe graphics interchange format
169        o  GIF87     rw- CompuServe graphics interchange format
170                         (version 87a)
171        o  GRADIENT  r-- Gradual passing from one shade to
172                         another
173        o  GRAY      rw+ Raw gray samples (8/16/32 bits,
174                         depending on the image depth)
175        o  HISTOGRAM -w- Histogram of the image
176        o  HRZ       r-- HRZ: Slow scan TV
177        o  HTML      -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
178                         client-side image map
179        o  ICB       rw+ Truevision Targa image
180        o  ICC       rw- ICC Color Profile
181        o  ICM       rw- ICC Color Profile
182        o  ICO       r-- Microsoft icon
183        o  ICON      r-- Microsoft icon
184        o  IDENTITY  r-- Hald CLUT identity image
185        o  IMAGE     r-- GraphicsMagick Embedded Image
186        o  INFO      -w+ Image descriptive information and
187                          statistics
188        o  IPTC      rw- IPTC Newsphoto
189        o  IPTCTEXT  rw- IPTC Newsphoto text format
190        o  IPTCWTEXT rw- IPTC Newsphoto wide text format
191        o  JBG       rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
192                         interchange format
193        o  JBIG      rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
194                         interchange format
195        o  JNG       rw- JPEG Network Graphics
196        o  JP2       rw- JPEG-2000 JP2 File Format Syntax
197        o  JPC       rw- JPEG-2000 Code Stream Syntax
198        o  JPEG      rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
199                         JFIF format
200        o  JPG       rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
201                         JFIF format
202        o  K25       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
203        o  KDC       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
204        o  LABEL     r-- Text image format
205        o  M2V       rw+ MPEG-2 Video Stream
206        o  MAP       rw- Colormap intensities and indices
207        o  MAT       r-- MATLAB image format
208        o  MATTE     -w+ MATTE format
209        o  MIFF      rw+ Magick Image File Format
210        o  MNG       rw+ Multiple-image Network Graphics
211        o  MONO      rw- Bi-level bitmap in least-significant-
212                         -byte-first order
213        o  MPC       rw+ Magick Persistent Cache image format
214        o  MPEG      rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
215        o  MPG       rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
216        o  MRW       r-- Minolta Photo Raw
217        o  MSL       r-- Magick Scripting Language
218        o  MTV       rw+ MTV Raytracing image format
219        o  MVG       rw- Magick Vector Graphics
220        o  NEF       r-- Nikon Electronic Format
221        o  NULL      r-- Constant image of uniform color
222        o  OTB       rw- On-the-air bitmap
223        o  P7        rw+ Xv thumbnail format
224        o  PAL       rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
225        o  PALM      rw- Palm Pixmap
226        o  PBM       rw+ Portable bitmap format (black and white)
227        o  PCD       rw- Photo CD
228        o  PCDS      rw- Photo CD
229        o  PCL       -w- Page Control Language
230        o  PCT       rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
231        o  PCX       rw- ZSoft IBM PC Paintbrush
232        o  PDB       rw+ Palm Database ImageViewer Format
233        o  PDF       rw+ Portable Document Format
234        o  PEF       r-- Pentax Electronic File
235        o  PFA       r-- TrueType font
236        o  PFB       r-- TrueType font
237        o  PGM       rw+ Portable graymap format (gray scale)
238        o  PGX       r-- JPEG-2000 VM Format
239        o  PICON     rw- Personal Icon
240        o  PICT      rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
241        o  PIX       r-- Alias/Wavefront RLE image format
242        o  PLASMA    r-- Plasma fractal image
243        o  PNG       rw- Portable Network Graphics
244        o  PNG24     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 24 bit RGB
245                         opaque only
246        o  PNG32     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 32 bit RGBA
247                         semitransparency OK
248        o  PNG8      rw- Portable Network Graphics, 8-bit
249                         indexed, binary transparency only
250        o  PNM       rw+ Portable anymap
251        o  PPM       rw+ Portable pixmap format (color)
252        o  PREVIEW   -w- Show a preview an image enhancement,
253                         effect, or f/x
254        o  PS        rw+ Adobe PostScript
255        o  PS2       -w+ Adobe Level II PostScript
256        o  PS3       -w+ Adobe Level III PostScript
257        o  PSD       rw- Adobe Photoshop bitmap
258        o  PTIF      rw- Pyramid encoded TIFF
259        o  PWP       r-- Seattle Film Works
260        o  RAF       r-- Fuji Photo RAW
261        o  RAS       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
262        o  RGB       rw+ Raw red, green, and blue samples
263        o  RGBA      rw+ Raw red, green, blue, and matte samples
264        o  RLA       r-- Alias/Wavefront image
265        o  RLE       r-- Utah Run length encoded image
266        o  SCT       r-- Scitex HandShake
267        o  SFW       r-- Seattle Film Works
268        o  SGI       rw+ Irix RGB image
269        o  SHTML     -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
270                         client-side image map
271        o  STEGANO   r-- Steganographic image
272        o  SUN       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
273        o  SVG       rw+ Scalable Vector Gaphics
274        o  TEXT      rw+ Raw text
275        o  TGA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
276        o  TIFF      rw+ Tagged Image File Format
277        o  TILE      r-- Tile image with a texture
278        o  TIM       r-- PSX TIM
279        o  TOPOL     r-- TOPOL X Image
280        o  TTF       r-- TrueType font
281        o  TXT       rw+ Raw text
282        o  UIL       -w- X-Motif UIL table
283        o  UYVY      rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
284        o  VDA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
285        o  VICAR     rw- VICAR rasterfile format
286        o  VID       rw+ Visual Image Directory
287        o  VIFF      rw+ Khoros Visualization image
288        o  VST       rw+ Truevision Targa image
289        o  WBMP      rw- Wireless Bitmap (level 0) image
290        o  WMF       r-- Windows Metafile
291        o  WPG       r-- Word Perfect Graphics
292        o  X         rw- X Image
293        o  X3F       r-- Foveon X3 (Sigma/Polaroid) RAW
294        o  XBM       rw- X Windows system bitmap (black
295                         and white)
296        o  XC        r-- Constant image uniform color
297        o  XCF       r-- GIMP image
298        o  XMP       rw- Adobe XML metadata
299        o  XPM       rw- X Windows system pixmap (color)
300        o  XV        rw+ Khoros Visualization image
301        o  XWD       rw- X Windows system window dump (color)
302        o  YUV       rw- CCIR 601 4:1:1 or 4:2:2 (8-bit only)
303
304           Modes:
305                     r   Read
306                     w   Write
307                     +   Multi-image
308
309
310       Support  for  some  of these formats require additional programs or li‐
311       braries.  See README in the source package for where to  find  optional
312       additional software.
313
314       Note,  a  format delineated with + means that if more than one image is
315       specified, frames are combined into a single multi-image file. Use +ad‐
316       join if you want a single image produced for each frame.
317
318       Your installation might not support all of the formats in the list.  To
319       get an accurate listing of the formats  supported  by  your  particular
320       configuration, run "gm convert -list format".
321
322       Raw  images  are  expected to have one byte per pixel unless gm is com‐
323       piled in 16-bit quantum mode or in 32-bit quantum mode. Here,  the  raw
324       data  is  expected  to  be  stored two or four bytes per pixel, respec‐
325       tively, in most-significant-byte-first order.   For  example,  you  can
326       tell  if  gm was compiled in 16-bit mode by typing "gm version" without
327       any options, and looking for "Q:16" in the first line of output.
328

FILES AND FORMATS

330       By default, the image format is determined by its magic  number,  i.e.,
331       the  first few bytes of the file. To specify a particular image format,
332       precede the filename with an image format name and a colon  (i.e.ps:im‐
333       age)  or  specify the image type as the filename suffix (i.e.image.ps).
334       The magic number takes precedence over the filename suffix and the pre‐
335       fix  takes  precedence  over  the  magic number and the suffix in input
336       files.  When a file is read, its magic number is  stored  in  the  "im‐
337       age->magick" string.  In output files, the prefix takes precedence over
338       the filename suffix, and the filename suffix takes precedence over  the
339       "image->magick" string.
340
341       To read the "built-in" formats (GRANITE, H, LOGO, NETSCAPE, PLASMA, and
342       ROSE) use a prefix (including the colon) without a filename or  suffix.
343       To read the XC format, follow the colon with a color specification.  To
344       read the CAPTION format, follow the colon with a text string or with  a
345       filename prefixed with the at symbol (@).
346
347
348       When  you  specify X as your image type, the filename has special mean‐
349       ing. It specifies an X window by id, name, or root. If no  filename  is
350       specified,  the window is selected by clicking the mouse in the desired
351       window.
352
353       Specify input_file as - for standard input, output_file as - for  stan‐
354       dard  output.   If  input_file has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is
355       uncompressed with uncompress or gunzip  respectively.   If  output_file
356       has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is compressed using with compress
357       or gzip respectively.
358
359       Use an optional index enclosed in brackets after an input file name  to
360       specify  a  desired  subimage  of  a multi-resolution image format like
361       Photo CD (e.g. "img0001.pcd[4]") or  a  range  for  MPEG  images  (e.g.
362       "video.mpg[50-75]").  A  subimage  specification  can be disjoint (e.g.
363       "image.tiff[2,7,4]"). For raw images, specify a subimage with a  geome‐
364       try  (e.g. -size 640x512 "image.rgb[320x256+50+50]").  Surround the im‐
365       age name with quotation marks to prevent your shell  from  interpreting
366       the  square  brackets.  Single images are written with the filename you
367       specify. However, multi-part images (e.g., a multi-page PostScript doc‐
368       ument  with +adjoin specified) may be written with the scene number in‐
369       cluded as part of the filename. In order to include the scene number in
370       the filename, it is necessary to include a printf-style %d format spec‐
371       ification in the file name and use the +adjoin option. For example,
372
373           image%02d.miff
374
375       writes files image00.miff, image01.miff, etc. Only a single  specifica‐
376       tion  is allowed within an output filename. If more than one specifica‐
377       tion is present, it will be ignored. It is best to embed the scene num‐
378       ber  in  the  base part of the file name, not in the extension, because
379       the extension will not be a recognizeable image type.
380
381       When running a commandline utility, you can prepend an at sign @  to  a
382       filename to read a list of image filenames from that file. This is con‐
383       venient in the event you have too many image filenames to  fit  on  the
384       command line.
385

OPTIONS

387       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
388       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
389       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
390       Some options only affect the decoding of images and others only the en‐
391       coding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
392
393       This  is a combined list of the command-line options used by the Graph‐
394       icsMagick utilities (animate,  compare,  composite,  convert,  display,
395       identify, import, mogrify and montage).
396
397
398       In  this  document,  angle  brackets ("<>") enclose variables and curly
399       brackets ("{}") enclose optional parameters. For example, "-fuzz  <dis‐
400       tance>{%}" means you can use the option "-fuzz 10" or "-fuzz 2%".
401
402
403       -adjoin
404              join images into a single multi-image file
405
406              By  default,  all  images of an image sequence are stored in the
407              same file. However, some formats  (e.g.  JPEG)  do  not  support
408              storing more than one image per file and only the first frame in
409              an image sequence will be saved unless the result  is  saved  to
410              separate  files.  Use +adjoin to force saving multiple frames to
411              multiple numbered files. If +adjoin is  used,  then  the  output
412              filename  must  include  a printf style formatting specification
413              for the numeric part of the filename.  For example,
414
415                  image%02d.miff
416
417       -affine <matrix>
418              drawing transform matrix
419
420              This option provides a transform matrix {sx,rx,ry,sy,tx,ty}  for
421              use by subsequent -draw or -transform options.
422
423       -antialias
424              remove pixel aliasing
425
426              By default antialiasing algorithms are used when drawing objects
427              (e.g. lines) or rendering vector formats  (e.g.  WMF  and  Post‐
428              script).  Use  +antialias  to  disable use of antialiasing algo‐
429              rithms. Reasons to disable  antialiasing  include  avoiding  in‐
430              creasing colors in the image, or improving rendering speed.
431
432       -append
433              append a set of images
434
435              This option creates a single image where the images in the orig‐
436              inal set are stacked top-to-bottom.  If they are not of the same
437              width, any narrow images will be expanded to fit using the back‐
438              ground color.  Use +append to stack images  left-to-right.   The
439              set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.  If
440              the -append option appears after all of the  input  images,  all
441              images are appended.
442
443       -asc-cdl <spec>
444              apply ASC CDL color transform
445
446              Applies  ("bakes in") the ASC CDL, which is a format for the ex‐
447              change of basic primary color grading information between equip‐
448              ment  and  software from different manufacturers. The format de‐
449              fines the math for three functions:  slope,  offset  and  power.
450              Each  function  uses a number for the red, green, and blue color
451              channels for a total of nine numbers comprising a  single  color
452              decision. The tenth number (optional) is for chromiance (satura‐
453              tion) as specified by ASC CDL 1.2.
454
455              The argument string is comma delimited and is in  the  following
456              form (but without invervening spaces or line breaks)
457
458                  redslope,redoffset,redpower:
459                  greenslope,greenoffset,greenpower:
460                  blueslope,blueoffset,bluepower:
461                  saturation
462
463              with the unity (no change) specification being:
464
465                  "1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0"
466
467       -authenticate <string>
468              decrypt image with this password
469
470              Use  this option to supply a password for decrypting an image or
471              an image sequence, if it is being read from a format such as PDF
472              that  supports  encryption.   Encrypting images being written is
473              not supported.
474
475       -auto-orient
476              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
477
478              Adjusts the image orienation so that it is suitable for viewing.
479              Uses the orientation tag obtained from the image file or as sup‐
480              plied by the -orient option.
481
482       -average
483              average a set of images
484
485              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
486              If  the  -average  option appears after all of the input images,
487              all images are averaged.
488
489       -backdrop
490              display the image centered on a backdrop.
491
492              This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is useful
493              for  hiding other X window activity while viewing the image. The
494              color of the backdrop is specified as the foreground color  (X11
495              default is black).  Refer to "X Resources", below, for details.
496
497       -background <color>
498              the background color
499
500              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
501              -fill option.
502
503       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
504              pixels below the threshold become black
505
506              Use -black-threshold to set pixels with values below the  speci‐
507              fied  threshold  to  minimum value (black). If only one value is
508              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
509              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
510              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
511              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
512              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
513              a  channel  later  in  the  list. If a percent (%) symbol is ap‐
514              pended, then the values are treated as a percentage  of  maximum
515              range.
516
517       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
518              blue chromaticity primary point
519
520       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
521              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
522
523              Blur with the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
524
525       -border <width>x<height>
526              surround the image with a border of color
527
528              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
529
530       -bordercolor <color>
531              the border color
532
533              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
534              -fill option.
535
536       -borderwidth <geometry>
537              the border width
538
539       -box <color>
540              set the color of the annotation bounding box
541
542              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
543              -fill option.
544
545              See -draw for further details.
546
547       -channel <type>
548              the type of channel
549
550              Choose  from:  Red,  Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan, Magenta,
551              Yellow, Black, or Gray.
552
553              Use this option to extract a particular channel from the  image.
554              Opacity,  for example, is useful for extracting the opacity val‐
555              ues from an image.
556
557       -charcoal <factor>
558              simulate a charcoal drawing
559
560       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
561              remove pixels from the interior of an image
562
563              Width and height give the number of columns and rows to  remove,
564              and  x  and y are offsets that give the location of the leftmost
565              column and topmost row to remove.
566
567              The x offset normally specifies the leftmost column  to  remove.
568              If  the  -gravity  option  is  present  with NorthEast, East, or
569              SouthEast gravity, it gives the distance leftward from the right
570              edge of the image to the rightmost column to remove.  Similarly,
571              the y offset normally specifies the topmost row to  remove,  but
572              if  the  -gravity  option  is  present with SouthWest, South, or
573              SouthEast gravity, it specifies the  distance  upward  from  the
574              bottom edge of the image to the bottom row to remove.
575
576              The  -chop option removes entire rows and columns, and moves the
577              remaining corner blocks leftward and upward to close the gaps.
578
579       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
580
581              If a clipping path is present, it will be applied to  subsequent
582              operations.
583
584              For example, if you type the following command:
585
586                  gm convert -clip -negate cockatoo.tif negated.tif
587
588              only the pixels within the clipping path are negated.
589
590              The  -clip feature requires the XML library.  If the XML library
591              is not present, the option is ignored.
592
593       -coalesce
594              merge a sequence of images
595
596              Each image N in the sequence after Image 0 is replaced with  the
597              image created by flattening images 0 through N.
598
599              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
600              If the -coalesce option appears after all of the  input  images,
601              all images are coalesced.
602
603       -colorize <value>
604              colorize the image with the pen color
605
606              Specify  the amount of colorization as a percentage. You can ap‐
607              ply separate colorization values to the  red,  green,  and  blue
608              channels  of  the image with a colorization value list delimited
609              with slashes (e.g. 0/0/50).
610
611              The -colorize option may be used in conjunction  with  -modulate
612              to produce a nice sepia toned image like:
613
614                  gm convert input.ppm -modulate 115,0,100 \
615                            -colorize 7,21,50 output.ppm.
616
617       -colormap <type>
618              define the colormap type
619
620              Choose between shared or private.
621
622              This  option  only  applies  when the default X server visual is
623              PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more details.  By
624              default, a shared colormap is allocated. The image shares colors
625              with other X clients.  Some image colors could be  approximated,
626              therefore  your  image  may  look  very different than intended.
627              Choose Private and the image colors appear exactly as  they  are
628              defined.  However, other clients may go technicolor when the im‐
629              age colormap is installed.
630
631       -colors <value>
632              preferred number of colors in the image
633
634              The actual number of colors in the image may be less  than  your
635              request, but never more. Note, this is a color reduction option.
636              Images with less unique colors than specified with  this  option
637              will  have  any duplicate or unused colors removed. The ordering
638              of an existing color palette may be altered. When converting  an
639              image  from  color  to  grayscale, convert the image to the gray
640              colorspace before reducing the number of colors since  doing  so
641              is most efficient. Refer to <a href="quantize.html">quantize for
642              more details.
643
644              Note, options -dither, -colorspace, and  -treedepth  affect  the
645              color reduction algorithm.
646
647       -colorspace <value>
648              the type of colorspace
649
650              Choices  are:  CineonLog,  CMYK,  GRAY,  HSL,  HWB,  OHTA,  RGB,
651              Rec601Luma, Rec709Luma, Rec601YCbCr,  Rec709YCbCr,  Transparent,
652              XYZ, YCbCr, YIQ, YPbPr, or YUV.
653
654              Color reduction, by default, takes place in the RGB color space.
655              Empirical evidence suggests that distances in color spaces  such
656              as  YUV  or  YIQ correspond to perceptual color differences more
657              closely than do distances in RGB space.  These color spaces  may
658              give  better  results  when  color  reducing an image.  Refer to
659              quantize for more details.  Two gray colorspaces are  supported.
660              The  Rec601Luma space is based on the recommendations for legacy
661              NTSC television (ITU-R BT.601-5).  The Rec709Luma space is based
662              on  the  recommendations  for  HDTV (Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5) and is
663              suitable for use with computer graphics,  and  for  contemporary
664              CRT   displays.   The  GRAY  colorspace  currently  selects  the
665              Rec601Luma colorspace by default for backwards  compatibly  rea‐
666              sons. This default may be re-considered in the future.
667
668              Two  YCbCr  colorspaces  are supported. The Rec601YCbCr space is
669              based on the recommendations for legacy NTSC  television  (ITU-R
670              BT.601-5).  The Rec709CbCr space is based on the recommendations
671              for HDTV (Rec.  ITU-R BT.709-5) and is suitable for suitable for
672              use  with  computer graphics, and for contemporary CRT displays.
673              The YCbCr colorspace specification is equivalent toRec601YCbCr.
674
675
676              The Transparent color space behaves uniquely  in  that  it  pre‐
677              serves the matte channel of the image if it exists.
678
679              The  -colors  or  -monochrome option, or saving to a file format
680              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
681              take effect.
682
683       -comment <string>
684              annotate an image with a comment
685
686              Use  this option to assign a specific comment to the image, when
687              writing to an image format that supports comments. You  can  in‐
688              clude  the  image  filename, type, width, height, or other image
689              attribute by embedding special format  characters  listed  under
690              the  -format option.  The comment is not drawn on the image, but
691              is embedded in the image datastream via a "Comment" tag or simi‐
692              lar mechanism.  If you want the comment to be visible on the im‐
693              age itself, use the -draw option instead.
694
695              For example,
696
697                   -comment "%m:%f %wx%h"
698
699              produces an image comment of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
700              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
701
702              If the first character of string is @, the image comment is read
703              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
704              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
705              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
706              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file could be incorporated in a
707              comment in the output file (a security risk).
708
709              If the -comment option appears multiple  times,  only  the  last
710              comment is stored.
711
712              In  PNG  images,  the  comment is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk
713              with the keyword "comment".
714
715       -compose <operator>
716              the type of image composition
717
718              The description of composition uses abstract terminology in  or‐
719              der  to allow the the description to be more clear, while avoid‐
720              ing constant values which are specific  to  a  particular  build
721              configuration.  Each  image  pixel is represented by red, green,
722              and blue levels (which are equal for a gray  pixel).  MaxRGB  is
723              the  maximum  integral  value  which  may  be stored in the red,
724              green, or blue channels of the image. Each image pixel may  also
725              optionally (if the image matte channel is enabled) have an asso‐
726              ciated level of opacity (ranging from  opaque  to  transparent),
727              which  may be used to determine the influence of the pixel color
728              when compositing the pixel with another image pixel. If the  im‐
729              age  matte channel is disabled, then all pixels in the image are
730              treated as opaque.  The color of an opaque pixel is fully  visi‐
731              ble while the color of a transparent pixel color is entirely ab‐
732              sent (pixel color is ignored).
733
734              By definition, raster images have a rectangular shape. All image
735              rows  are  of  equal length, and all image columns have the same
736              number of rows. By treating the  opacity  channel  as  a  visual
737              "mask"  the rectangular image may be given a "shape" by treating
738              the opacity channel as a cookie-cutter  for  the  image.  Pixels
739              within  the shape are opaque, while pixels outside the shape are
740              transparent. Pixels on the boundary of the shape may be  between
741              opaque  and  transparent  in order to provide antialiasing (vis‐
742              ually smooth edges). The description of the  composition  opera‐
743              tors  use this concept of image "shape" in order to make the de‐
744              scription of the operators easier to  understand.  While  it  is
745              convenient  to  describe the operators in terms of "shapes" they
746              are by no means limited to mask-style operations since they  are
747              based  on continuous floating-point mathematics rather than sim‐
748              ple boolean operations.
749
750              By default, the Over composite operator is used.  The  following
751              composite operators are available:
752
753                   Over
754                   In
755                   Out
756                   Atop
757                   Xor
758                   Plus
759                   Minus
760                   Add
761                   Subtract
762                   Difference
763                   Divide
764                   Multiply
765                   Bumpmap
766                   Copy
767                   CopyRed
768                   CopyGreen
769                   CopyBlue
770                   CopyOpacity
771                   CopyCyan
772                   CopyMagenta
773                   CopyYellow
774                   CopyBlack
775
776              The behavior of each operator is described below.
777
778
779               Over
780
781                    The result will be the union of the two image shapes, with
782                    opaque areas of change-image obscuring base-image  in  the
783                    region of overlap.
784
785               In
786
787                    The  result  is  simply  change-image  cut by the shape of
788                    base-image. None of the image data of base-image  will  be
789                    in the result.
790
791               Out
792
793                    The  resulting  image  is  change-image  with the shape of
794                    base-image cut out.
795
796               Atop
797
798                    The result is the same shape as base-image,  with  change-
799                    image obscuring base-image where the image shapes overlap.
800                    Note this differs from over because the portion of change-
801                    image  outside  base-image's  shape does not appear in the
802                    result.
803
804               Xor
805
806                    The result is the image data from  both  change-image  and
807                    base-image that is outside the overlap region. The overlap
808                    region will be blank.
809
810               Plus
811
812                    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output  val‐
813                    ues are cropped to MaxRGB (no overflow). This operation is
814                    independent of the matte channels.
815
816               Minus
817
818                    The result of change-image -  base-image,  with  underflow
819                    cropped  to  zero.  The  matte  channel is ignored (set to
820                    opaque, full coverage).
821
822               Add
823
824                    The result of change-image  +  base-image,  with  overflow
825                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1).
826
827               Subtract
828
829                    The  result  of  change-image - base-image, with underflow
830                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and subtract oper‐
831                    ators can be used to perform reversible transformations.
832
833               Difference
834
835                    The result of abs(change-image - base-image). This is use‐
836                    ful for comparing two very similar images.
837
838               Divide
839
840                    The result of change-image / base-image.  This  is  useful
841                    for  improving the readability of text on unevenly illumi‐
842                    nated photos (by using a gaussian blurred copy of  change-
843                    image as base-image).
844
845               Multiply
846
847                    The  result  of  change-image * base-image. This is useful
848                    for the creation of drop-shadows.
849
850               Bumpmap
851
852                    The result base-image shaded by change-image.
853
854               Copy
855
856                    The resulting image is base-image replaced with change-im‐
857                    age. Here the matte information is ignored.
858
859               CopyRed
860
861                    The  resulting  image is the red channel in base-image re‐
862                    placed with the red channel  in  change-image.  The  other
863                    channels are copied untouched.
864
865               CopyGreen
866
867                    The resulting image is the green channel in base-image re‐
868                    placed with the green channel in change-image.  The  other
869                    channels are copied untouched.
870
871               CopyBlue
872
873                    The  resulting image is the blue channel in base-image re‐
874                    placed with the blue channel in  change-image.  The  other
875                    channels are copied untouched.
876
877               CopyOpacity
878
879                    The  resulting  image is the opacity channel in base-image
880                    replaced with the opacity  channel  in  change-image.  The
881                    other channels are copied untouched.
882
883               CopyCyan
884
885                    The  resulting image is the cyan channel in base-image re‐
886                    placed with the cyan channel in  change-image.  The  other
887                    channels  are  copied  untouched. Use of this operator re‐
888                    quires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
889
890               CopyMagenta
891
892                    The resulting image is the magenta channel  in  base-image
893                    replaced  with  the  magenta  channel in change-image. The
894                    other channels are copied untouched. Use of this  operator
895                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
896
897               CopyYellow
898
899                    The  resulting  image  is the yellow channel in base-image
900                    replaced with the  yellow  channel  in  change-image.  The
901                    other  channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
902                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
903
904               CopyBlack
905
906                    The resulting image is the black channel in base-image re‐
907                    placed  with  the black channel in change-image. The other
908                    channels are copied untouched. Use of  this  operator  re‐
909                    quires  that  base-image  be  in  CMYK(A)  colorspace.  If
910                    change-image is not in CMYK space, then  the  change-image
911                    pixel intensities are used.
912
913
914
915
916       -compress <type>
917              the type of image compression
918
919              Choices  are:  None,  BZip, Fax, Group3, Group4, JPEG, Lossless,
920              LZW, RLE, Zip, LZMA, JPEG2000, JPEG2000, JBIG, JBIG2,  WebP,  or
921              ZSTD.
922
923
924              Specify  +compress  to store the binary image in an uncompressed
925              format.  The default is the compression type  of  the  specified
926              image file.
927
928              "Lossless"  refers  to lossless JPEG, which is only available if
929              the JPEG library has been patched to support it. Use of lossless
930              JPEG is generally not recommended.
931
932              Use  the -quality option to set the compression level to be used
933              by the JPEG, JPEG-2000, PNG, MIFF, MPEG, and TIFF encoders.  Use
934              the  -sampling-factor  option  to  set the sampling factor to be
935              used by the DPX, JPEG, MPEG, and YUV encoders  for  downsampling
936              the chroma channels.
937
938       -contrast
939              enhance or reduce the image contrast
940
941              This  option  enhances  the  intensity  differences  between the
942              lighter and darker elements of the image. Use -contrast  to  en‐
943              hance the image or +contrast to reduce the image contrast.
944
945
946              For a more pronounced effect you can repeat the option:
947
948                  gm convert rose: -contrast -contrast rose_c2.png
949
950       -convolve <kernel>
951              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
952
953              The  kernel  is  specified as a comma-separated list of floating
954              point values, ordered left-to right, starting with the top  row.
955              The  order of the kernel is determined by the square root of the
956              number of entries.  Presently only square kernels are supported.
957
958       -create-directories
959              create output directory if required
960
961              Use this option with -output-directory if the input  paths  con‐
962              tain  subdirectories  and it is desired to create similar subdi‐
963              rectories in the output directory.  Without this option, mogrify
964              will fail if the required output directory does not exist.
965
966       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
967              preferred size and location of the cropped image
968
969              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
970
971              The width and height give the size of the image that remains af‐
972              ter cropping, and x and y are offsets that give the location  of
973              the  top  left  corner  of the cropped image with respect to the
974              original image.  To specify the amount to be removed, use -shave
975              instead.
976
977              If the x and y offsets are present, a single image is generated,
978              consisting of the pixels from the cropping region.  The  offsets
979              specify  the  location  of the upper left corner of the cropping
980              region measured downward and rightward with respect to the upper
981              left  corner  of  the  image.  If the -gravity option is present
982              with NorthEast, East, or SouthEast gravity, it  gives  the  dis‐
983              tance  leftward  from  the  right edge of the image to the right
984              edge of the cropping region.  Similarly, if the -gravity  option
985              is present with SouthWest, South, or SouthEast gravity, the dis‐
986              tance is measured upward between the bottom edges.
987
988              If the x and y offsets are omitted, a set of tiles of the speci‐
989              fied  geometry,  covering  the entire input image, is generated.
990              The rightmost tiles and the bottom  tiles  are  smaller  if  the
991              specified  geometry  extends  beyond the dimensions of the input
992              image.
993
994       -cycle <amount>
995              displace image colormap by amount
996
997              Amount defines the number of positions each colormap  entry  is‐
998              shifted.
999
1000
1001       -debug <events>
1002              enable debug printout
1003
1004              The  events  parameter  specifies which events are to be logged.
1005              It can be either None, All, or a comma-separated list consisting
1006              of  one or more of the following domains: Annotate, Blob, Cache,
1007              Coder, Configure, Deprecate, Error, Exception,  FatalError,  In‐
1008              formation,  Locale,  Option,  Render,  Resource,  TemporaryFile,
1009              Transform, User.  Warning, or X11, For example, to log cache and
1010              blob events, use
1011
1012                  gm convert -debug "Cache,Blob" rose: rose.png
1013
1014              The  "User"  domain  is  normally  empty, but developers can log
1015              "User" events in their private copy of GraphicsMagick.
1016
1017              Use the -log option to specify the format for debugging output.
1018
1019              Use +debug to turn off all logging.
1020
1021              An alternative to using -debug is to use the MAGICK_DEBUG  envi‐
1022              ronment  variable. The allowed values for the MAGICK_DEBUG envi‐
1023              ronment variable are the same as for the -debug option.
1024
1025       -deconstruct
1026              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
1027
1028              This option compares each image with the next in a sequence  and
1029              returns  the maximum bounding region of any pixel differences it
1030              discovers.  This method can undo a coalesced  sequence  returned
1031              by  the  -coalesce  option, and is useful for removing redundant
1032              information from a GIF or MNG animation.
1033
1034              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1035              option.  If the -deconstruct option appears after all of the in‐
1036              put images, all images are deconstructed.
1037
1038       -define <key>{=<value>},...
1039              add coder/decoder specific options This option  creates  one  or
1040              more  definitions  for  coders and decoders to use while reading
1041              and writing image data. Definitions may be passed to coders  and
1042              decoders  to  control options that are specific to certain image
1043              formats. If value is missing for a definition,  an  empty-valued
1044              definition  of  a  flag  will be created with that name. This is
1045              used to control on/off options. Use +define <key>,... to  remove
1046              definitions  previously  created.  Use +define "*" to remove all
1047              existing definitions.
1048
1049              The following definitions may be created:
1050
1051
1052               cineon:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1053
1054                    Use the cineon:colorspace option  when  reading  a  Cineon
1055                    file  to specify the colorspace the Cineon file uses. This
1056                    overrides the colorspace type implied by  the  DPX  header
1057                    (if any).
1058
1059               dpx:bits-per-sample=<value>
1060
1061                    If  the dpx:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1062                    will write DPX images with the specified bits per  sample,
1063                    overriding any existing depth value. If this option is not
1064                    specified, then the value is based on the  existing  image
1065                    depth value from the original image file. The DPX standard
1066                    supports bits per sample values of 1, 8, 10, 12,  and  16.
1067                    Many DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits with type
1068                    A padding (see below).
1069
1070               dpx:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1071
1072                    Use the dpx:colorspace option when reading a DPX  file  to
1073                    specify  the  colorspace the DPX file uses. This overrides
1074                    the colorspace type implied by the DPX header (if any).
1075
1076               dpx:packing-method={packed|a|b|lsbpad|msbpad}
1077
1078                    DPX samples are output within 32-bit words.  They  may  be
1079                    tightly  packed  end-to-end  within  the words ("packed"),
1080                    padded with null bits to the right of the sample  ("a"  or
1081                    "lsbpad"),  or  padded  with  null bits to the left of the
1082                    sample ("b" or "msbpad"). This option only has  an  effect
1083                    for  sample  sizes  of  10  or 12 bits. If samples are not
1084                    packed, the DPX standard recommends type A  padding.  Many
1085                    DPX  readers  demand  a sample size of 10 bits with type A
1086                    padding.
1087
1088               dpx:pixel-endian={lsb|msb}
1089
1090                    Allows the user to specify the endian order of the  pixels
1091                    when  reading  or writing the DPX files. Sometimes this is
1092                    useful if the file is (or must be) written incorrectly  so
1093                    that  the file header and the pixels use different endian‐
1094                    ness.
1095
1096               dpx:swap-samples={true|false}
1097
1098               dpx:swap-samples-read={true|false}
1099
1100               dpx:swap-samples-write={true|false}
1101
1102                    GraphicsMagick strives to adhere to the DPX  standard  but
1103                    certain aspects of the standard can be quite confusing. As
1104                    a result, some 10-bit DPX files have Red and  Blue  inter‐
1105                    changed, or Cb and Cr interchanged due to an different in‐
1106                    terpretation  of  the  standard,  or  getting  the   wires
1107                    crossed.  The  swap-samples  option  may  be supplied when
1108                    reading or writing in order to read  or  write  using  the
1109                    necessary  sample order.  Use swap-samples-read when swap‐
1110                    ping should only occur in  the  reader,  or  swap-samples-
1111                    write when swapping should only occur in the writer.
1112
1113               gradient:direction={South|North|West|East|NorthWest|North‐
1114               East|SouthWest|SouthEast}
1115
1116                    By default, the gradient coder produces  a  gradient  from
1117                    top to bottom ("South").  Since GraphicsMagick 1.3.35, the
1118                    gradient direction may be specified  to  produce  gradient
1119                    vectors  according  to  a gravity-like specification.  The
1120                    arguments are South (Top  to  Bottom),  North  (Bottom  to
1121                    Top),  West  (Right to Left), East (Left to Right), North‐
1122                    West (Bottom-Right to Top-Left), NorthEast (Bottom-Left to
1123                    Top-Right),  SouthWest (Top-Right Bottom-Left), and South‐
1124                    East (Top-Left to Bottom-Right).
1125
1126               jp2:rate=<value>
1127
1128                    Specify  the  compression  factor  to  use  while  writing
1129                    JPEG-2000  files. The compression factor is the reciprocal
1130                    of the compression ratio. The valid range is 0.0  to  1.0,
1131                    with 1.0 indicating lossless compression. If defined, this
1132                    value overrides the -quality setting. The default  quality
1133                    setting of 75 results in a rate value of 0.06641.
1134
1135               jpeg:arithmetic={true|false}
1136
1137                    Enables  or  disables  arithmetic encoding if the JPEG li‐
1138                    brary supports it (default disabled).  When  this  is  en‐
1139                    abled, optimize-coding is necessarily disabled.
1140
1141               jpeg:block-smoothing={true|false}
1142
1143                    Enables  or  disables  block smoothing when reading a JPEG
1144                    file (default enabled).
1145
1146               jpeg:dct-method=<value>
1147
1148                    Selects the IJG JPEG library DCT  implementation  to  use.
1149                    The  encoding  implementations  vary in speed and encoding
1150                    error. The available choices for value are  islow,  ifast,
1151                    float,  default  and  fastest. Note that fastest might not
1152                    necessarily be fastest  on  your  CPU,  depending  on  the
1153                    choices  made when the JPEG library was built and how your
1154                    CPU behaves.
1155
1156               jpeg:fancy-upsampling={true|false}
1157
1158                    Enables or disables fancy upsampling when reading  a  JPEG
1159                    file (default enabled).
1160
1161               jpeg:max-scan-number=<value>
1162
1163                    Specifies  an integer value for the maximum number of pro‐
1164                    gressive scans allowed in a JPEG file.  The default  maxi‐
1165                    mum is 100 scans.  This limit is imposed due to a weakness
1166                    in the JPEG standard which allows small JPEG files to take
1167                    many minutes or hours to be read.
1168
1169               jpeg:max-warnings=<value>
1170
1171                    Specifies  an  integer value for how many warnings are al‐
1172                    lowed for any given error type before being promoted to  a
1173                    hard error.  JPEG files producing excessive warnings indi‐
1174                    cate a problem with the file.
1175
1176               jpeg:optimize-coding={true|false}
1177
1178                    Selects if huffman encoding should be used. Huffman encod‐
1179                    ing  is  enabled  by default, but may be disabled for very
1180                    large images since it encoding requires  that  the  entire
1181                    image  be  buffered  in  memory. Huffman encoding produces
1182                    smaller JPEG files at the  expense  of  added  compression
1183                    time and memory consumption.
1184
1185               jpeg:preserve-settings
1186
1187                    If  the  jpeg:preserve-settings  flag is defined, the JPEG
1188                    encoder will use the same "quality" and  "sampling-factor"
1189                    settings  that  were found in the input file, if the input
1190                    was in JPEG format. These settings are also  preserved  if
1191                    the input is a JPEG file and the output is a JNG file.  If
1192                    the colorspace of the output file differs from that of the
1193                    input  file, the quality setting is preserved but the sam‐
1194                    pling-factors are not.
1195
1196               pcl:fit-to-page
1197
1198                    If the pcl:fit-to-page flag is defined, then  the  printer
1199                    is  requested  to  scale  the  image  to fit the page size
1200                    (width and/or height).
1201               png:chunk-malloc-max=<value>
1202
1203                    png:chunk-malloc-max specifies the maximum chunk size that
1204                    libpng  will be allowed to read.  Libpng's default is nor‐
1205                    mally 8,000,000 bytes. Very rarely, a valid PNG  file  may
1206                    be  encountered where the error is reported "chunk data is
1207                    too large".  In this case, the limit may be increased  us‐
1208                    ing  this  option.   Take  care when increasing this limit
1209                    since an excessively large  limit  could  allow  untrusted
1210                    files to use excessive memory.
1211
1212               mng:maximum-loops=<value>
1213
1214                    mng:maximum-loops  specifies  the  maximum number of loops
1215                    allowed to be specified by a MNG LOOP  chunk.  Without  an
1216                    imposed  limit,  a MNG file could request up to 2147483647
1217                    loops, which could run for a very long time.  The  current
1218                    default limit is 512 loops.
1219
1220               pdf:use-cropbox={true|false}
1221
1222                    If  the  pdf:use-cropbox  flag is set to true, then Ghost‐
1223                    script is requested to apply the PDF crop box.
1224
1225               pdf:stop-on-error={true|false}
1226
1227                    If the pdf:stop-on-error flag is set to true, then  Ghost‐
1228                    script  is  requested  to stop processing the PDF when the
1229                    first error is encountered.  Otherwise it will attempt  to
1230                    process all requested pages.
1231
1232               ps:imagemask
1233
1234                    If  the  ps:imagemask  flag  is  defined, the PS3 and EPS3
1235                    coders will create Postscript files  that  render  bilevel
1236                    images  with  the Postscript imagemask operator instead of
1237                    the image operator.
1238
1239               ptif:minimum-geometry=<geometry>
1240
1241                    If the ptif:minimum-geometry key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1242                    ick  will  use  it  to determine the minimum frame size to
1243                    output when writing a pyramid TIFF file (a TIFF file  con‐
1244                    taining  a  succession  of  reduced  versions of the first
1245                    frame). The default minimum geometry is 32x32.
1246
1247               tiff:alpha={unspecified|associated|unassociated}
1248
1249                    Specify the TIFF alpha channel type when reading or  writ‐
1250                    ing  TIFF  files, overriding the normal value. The default
1251                    alpha channel type for new files is unspecified alpha. Ex‐
1252                    isting  alpha  settings are preserved when converting from
1253                    one TIFF file to another. When a TIFF file uses associated
1254                    alpha,  the image pixels are pre-multiplied (i.e. altered)
1255                    with the alpha channel. Files with "associated" alpha  ap‐
1256                    pear  as  if  they  were alpha composited on a black back‐
1257                    ground when the matte channel is disabled. If the  unasso‐
1258                    ciated  alpha  type is selected, then the alpha channel is
1259                    saved without altering the  pixels.  Photoshop  recognizes
1260                    associated  alpha as transparency information, if the file
1261                    is saved with unassociated alpha, the alpha information is
1262                    loaded  as  an  independent  channel.   Note that for many
1263                    years, ImageMagick and GraphicsMagick marked TIFF files as
1264                    using  associated  alpha, without properly pre-multiplying
1265                    the pixels.
1266
1267               tiff:fill-order={msb2lsb|lsb2msb}
1268
1269                    If the tiff:fill-order key is defined, GraphicsMagick will
1270                    use  it to determine the bit fill order used while writing
1271                    TIFF files. The normal default is "msb2lsb", which matches
1272                    the  native  bit order of all modern CPUs. The only excep‐
1273                    tion to this is when Group3 or Group4 FAX  compression  is
1274                    requested since FAX machines send data in bit-reversed or‐
1275                    der and therefore RFC 2301 recommends using reverse order.
1276
1277               tiff:group-three-options=<value>
1278
1279                    If the tiff:group-three-options key is defined,  Graphics‐
1280                    Magick  will  use  it  to  set the group3 options tag when
1281                    writing group3-compressed TIFF.  Please see the TIFF spec‐
1282                    ification for the usage of this tag.  The default value is
1283                    4.
1284
1285               tiff:ignore-tags=<tags>
1286
1287                    If the tiff:ignore-tags key is defined, then it is used as
1288                    a  list  of comma-delimited integer TIFF tag values to ig‐
1289                    nore while reading the TIFF file.  This is useful in order
1290                    to  be  able  to  read files which which otherwise fail to
1291                    read due to problems with TIFF tags.  Note that some  TIFF
1292                    tags  are  required  in order to be able to read the image
1293                    data at all.
1294
1295               tiff:report-warnings={false|true}
1296
1297                    If the tiff:report-warnings key  is  defined  and  set  to
1298                    true,  then TIFF warnings are reported as a warning excep‐
1299                    tion rather than as a coder log  message.   Such  warnings
1300                    are  reported  after  the  image has been read or written.
1301                    Most TIFF warnings are benign but sometimes they may  help
1302                    deduce  problems  with  the TIFF file, or help detect that
1303                    the TIFF file requires a special application to read  suc‐
1304                    cessfully due to the use of proprietary or specialized ex‐
1305                    tensions.
1306
1307               tiff:sample-format={unsigned|ieeefp}
1308
1309                    If the tiff:sample-format key is  defined,  GraphicsMagick
1310                    will  use  it  to  determine  the sample format used while
1311                    writing TIFF files. The  default  is  "unsigned".  Specify
1312                    "ieeefp"  in order to write floating-point TIFF files with
1313                    float  (32-bit)  or  double  (64-bit)  values.   Use   the
1314                    tiff:bits-per-sample  define  to  determine  the  type  of
1315                    floating-point value to use.
1316
1317               tiff:max-sample-value=<value>
1318
1319                    If the tiff:max-sample-value key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1320                    ick  will  use  the assigned value as the maximum floating
1321                    point value while reading or writing IEEE  floating  point
1322                    TIFFs. Otherwise the maximum value is 1.0 or the value ob‐
1323                    tained from the file's SMaxSampleValue tag  (if  present).
1324                    The  floating  point  data is currently not scanned in ad‐
1325                    vance to determine a best maximum sample value so  if  the
1326                    range  is  not  1.0,  or  the  SMaxSampleValue  tag is not
1327                    present, it may be necessary to (intelligently)  use  this
1328                    parameter to properly read a file.
1329
1330               tiff:min-sample-value=<value>
1331
1332                    If  the tiff:min-sample-value key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1333                    ick will use the assigned value as  the  minimum  floating
1334                    point  value  while reading or writing IEEE floating point
1335                    TIFFs. Otherwise the minimum value is 0.0 or the value ob‐
1336                    tained from the file's SMinSampleValue tag (if present).
1337
1338               tiff:bits-per-sample=<value>
1339
1340                    If the tiff:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1341                    will write images with  the  specified  bits  per  sample,
1342                    overriding  any  existing depth value. Value may be any in
1343                    the range of 1 to 32, or 64 when  the  default  ´unsigned'
1344                    format  is  written,  or  16/32/24/64  if IEEEFP format is
1345                    written.  Please note that the baseline TIFF 6.0  specifi‐
1346                    cation  only  requires readers to handle certain powers of
1347                    two, and the values to be handled depend on the nature  of
1348                    the image (e.g. colormapped, grayscale, RGB, CMYK).
1349
1350               tiff:samples-per-pixel=<value>
1351
1352                    If  the  tiff:samples-per-pixel key is defined to a value,
1353                    the TIFF coder will write TIFF  images  with  the  defined
1354                    samples  per pixel, overriding any value stored in the im‐
1355                    age. This option should not normally be used.
1356
1357               tiff:rows-per-strip=<value>
1358
1359                    Allows the user to specify the number  of  rows  per  TIFF
1360                    strip.   Rounded  up  to  a multiple of 16 when using JPEG
1361                    compression. Ignored when using tiles.
1362
1363               tiff:strip-per-page=true
1364
1365                    Requests that the image is written in a single TIFF strip.
1366                    This  is  normally  the default when group3 or group4 com‐
1367                    pression is requested within reasonable limits. Requesting
1368                    a  single strip for large images may result in failure due
1369                    to resource consumption in the writer or reader.
1370
1371               tiff:tile
1372
1373                    Enable writing tiled TIFF (rather than stripped) using the
1374                    default  tile  size.  Tiled TIFF organizes the image as an
1375                    array of smaller images (tiles) in order to enable  random
1376                    access.
1377
1378               tiff:tile-geometry=<width>x<height>
1379
1380                    Specify  the  tile  size  to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1381                    Width and height should be a multiple of 16. If the  value
1382                    is not a multiple of 16, then it will be rounded down. En‐
1383                    ables tiled TIFF if  it  has  not  already  been  enabled.
1384                    GraphicsMagick  does  not  use tiled storage internally so
1385                    tiles need to be converted back and forth from the  inter‐
1386                    nal  scanline-oriented  storage  to tile-oriented storage.
1387                    Testing with typical RGB images shows that  useful  square
1388                    tile  size  values  range from 128x128 to 1024x1024. Large
1389                    images which require using a disk-based pixel cache  bene‐
1390                    fit from large tile sizes while images which fit in memory
1391                    work well with smaller tile sizes.
1392
1393               tiff:tile-width=<width>
1394
1395                    Specify the tile width to use while  writing  tiled  TIFF.
1396                    The  tile height is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1397                    Width should be a multiple of 16. If the value  is  not  a
1398                    multiple  of  16,  then  it will be rounded down.  Enables
1399                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1400
1401               tiff:tile-height=<height>
1402
1403                    Specify the tile height to use while writing  tiled  TIFF.
1404                    The  tile  width is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1405                    Height should be a multiple of 16. If the value is  not  a
1406                    multiple  of  16,  then  it will be rounded down.  Enables
1407                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1408
1409               tiff:webp-lossless={TRUE|FALSE}
1410
1411                    Specify a value of TRUE  to  enable  lossless  mode  while
1412                    writing WebP-compressed TIFF files. The WebP webp:lossless
1413                    option may also be used.  The quality factor  set  by  the
1414                    -quality  option may be used to influence the level of ef‐
1415                    fort expended while compressing.
1416
1417               tiff:zstd-compress-level=<value>
1418
1419                    Specify the compression level to use while  writing  Zstd-
1420                    compressed TIFF files. The valid range is 1 to 22. If this
1421                    define is not specified, then the 'quality' value is  used
1422                    such  that the default quality setting of 75 is translated
1423                    to a compress level of 9 such that ´quality' has a  useful
1424                    range of 10-184 if used for this purpose.
1425
1426               webp:lossless={true|false}
1427
1428                    Enable lossless encoding.
1429
1430               webp:method={0-6}
1431
1432                    Quality/speed trade-off.
1433
1434               webp:image-hint={default,graph,photo,picture}
1435
1436                    Hint for image type.
1437
1438               webp:target-size=<integer>
1439
1440                    Target size in bytes.
1441
1442               webp:target-psnr=<float>
1443
1444                    Minimal distortion to try to achieve.
1445
1446               webp:segments={1-4}
1447
1448                    Maximum number of segments to use.
1449
1450               webp:sns-strength={0-100}
1451
1452                    Spatial Noise Shaping.
1453
1454               webp:filter-strength={0-100}
1455
1456                    Filter strength.
1457
1458               webp:filter-sharpness={0-7}
1459
1460                    Filter sharpness.
1461
1462               webp:filter-type={0,1}
1463
1464                    Filtering  type. 0 = simple, 1 = strong (only used if fil‐
1465                    ter-strength > 0 or autofilter is enabled).
1466
1467               webp:auto-filter={true|false}
1468
1469                    Auto adjust filter's strength.
1470
1471               webp:alpha-compression=<integer>
1472
1473                    Algorithm for encoding the alpha plane (0 = none, 1 = com‐
1474                    pressed with WebP lossless). Default is 1.
1475
1476               webp:alpha-filtering=<integer>
1477
1478                    Predictive  filtering  method for alpha plane. 0: none, 1:
1479                    fast, 2: best. Default is 1.
1480
1481               webp:alpha-quality={0-100}
1482
1483                    Between 0 (smallest size) and 100 (lossless).  Default  is
1484                    100.
1485
1486               webp:pass=[1..10]
1487
1488                    Number of entropy-analysis passes.
1489
1490               webp:show-compressed={true|false}
1491
1492                    Export  the compressed picture back.  In-loop filtering is
1493                    not applied.
1494
1495               webp:preprocessing=[0,1,2]
1496
1497                    0=none, 1=segment-smooth, 2=pseudo-random dithering
1498
1499               webp:partitions=[0-3]
1500
1501                    log2(number of token partitions) in [0..3].  Default is  0
1502                    for easier progressive decoding.
1503
1504               webp:partition-limit={0-100}
1505
1506                    Quality  degradation allowed to fit the 512k limit on pre‐
1507                    diction modes coding (0: no degradation, 100: maximum pos‐
1508                    sible degradation).
1509
1510               webp:emulate-jpeg-size={true|false}
1511
1512                    If true, compression parameters will be remapped to better
1513                    match the expected output size from JPEG compression. Gen‐
1514                    erally,  the  output size will be similar but the degrada‐
1515                    tion will be lower.
1516
1517               webp:thread-level=<integer>
1518
1519                    If non-zero, try and use multi-threaded encoding.
1520
1521               webp:low-memory={true|false}
1522
1523                    If set, reduce memory usage (but increase CPU use)
1524
1525               webp:use-sharp-yuv={true|false}
1526
1527                    If set, if needed, use sharp (and slow)  RGB->YUV  conver‐
1528                    sion
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533               For  example, to create a postscript file that will render only
1534               the black pixels of a bilevel image, use:
1535
1536                   gm convert bilevel.tif -define ps:imagemask eps3:stencil.ps
1537
1538       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
1539              display the next image after pausing
1540
1541              This option is useful for regulating the animation of image  se‐
1542              quences  Delay/100 seconds must expire before the display of the
1543              next image. The default is no delay between each showing of  the
1544              image sequence. The maximum delay is 65535.
1545
1546              You  can  specify  a delay range (e.g. -delay 10-500) which sets
1547              the minimum and maximum delay.
1548
1549       -density <width>x<height>
1550              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the  image  This
1551              option  specifies the image resolution to store while encoding a
1552              raster image or the canvas resolution while rendering  (reading)
1553              vector  formats  such  as  Postscript,  PDF, WMF, and SVG into a
1554              raster image. Image resolution provides the unit of  measure  to
1555              apply  when  rendering  to an output device or raster image. The
1556              default unit of measure is in dots per inch  (DPI).  The  -units
1557              option may be used to select dots per centimeter instead.
1558               The default resolution is 72 dots per inch, which is equivalent
1559              to one point per pixel (Macintosh and Postscript standard). Com‐
1560              puter screens are normally 72 or 96 dots per inch while printers
1561              typically support 150, 300, 600, or 1200 dots per inch.  To  de‐
1562              termine  the  resolution of your display, use a ruler to measure
1563              the width of your screen in inches, and divide by the number  of
1564              horizontal  pixels  (1024  on  a 1024x768 display).  If the file
1565              format supports it, this option may be used to update the stored
1566              image  resolution.  Note that Photoshop stores and obtains image
1567              resolution from a proprietary embedded profile. If this  profile
1568              is  not stripped from the image, then Photoshop will continue to
1569              treat the image using its former resolution, ignoring the  image
1570              resolution  specified  in the standard file header.  The density
1571              option is an attribute and does not alter the underlying  raster
1572              image.  It  may  be used to adjust the rendered size for desktop
1573              publishing purposes by adjusting the scale applied to  the  pix‐
1574              els.  To  resize the image so that it is the same size at a dif‐
1575              ferent resolution, use the -resample option.
1576
1577       -depth <value>
1578              depth of the image
1579
1580              This is the number of bits of color to preserve  in  the  image.
1581              Any value between 1 and QuantumDepth (build option) may be spec‐
1582              ified, although 8 or 16 are the most common values. Use this op‐
1583              tion  to  specify the depth of raw images whose depth is unknown
1584              such as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK, or to change the depth of any  image
1585              after it has been read.  The depth option is applied to the pix‐
1586              els immediately so it may be used as a form of  simple  compres‐
1587              sion  by  discarding  the  least  significant bits. Reducing the
1588              depth in advance may speed up color quantization, and help  cre‐
1589              ate  smaller  file sizes when using a compression algorithm like
1590              LZW or ZIP.
1591
1592       -descend
1593              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
1594
1595       -despeckle
1596              reduce the speckles within an image
1597
1598       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
1599              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
1600
1601              With this option, composite image is used as a displacement map.
1602              Black,  within  the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
1603              placement.  White is a maximum negative displacement and  middle
1604              gray  is  neutral.   The displacement is scaled to determine the
1605              pixel shift.  By default, the displacement applies in  both  the
1606              horizontal  and  vertical  directions.   However, if you specify
1607              mask, composite image is the horizontal X displacement and  mask
1608              the vertical Y displacement.
1609
1610       -display <host:display[.screen]>
1611              specifies the X server to contact
1612
1613              This  option  is  used  with convert for obtaining image or font
1614              from this X server.  See X(1).
1615
1616       -dispose <method>
1617              GIF disposal method
1618
1619              The Disposal Method indicates the way in which the graphic is to
1620              be treated after being displayed.
1621
1622              Here are the valid methods:
1623
1624                  Undefined       No disposal specified.
1625                  None            Do not dispose between frames.
1626                  Background      Overwrite the image area with
1627                                  the background color.
1628                  Previous        Overwrite the image area with
1629                                  what was there prior to rendering
1630                                  the image.
1631
1632       -dissolve <percent>
1633              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
1634
1635              The  opacity  of  the composite image is multiplied by the given
1636              percent, then it is composited over the main image.
1637
1638       -dither
1639              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
1640
1641              The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity resolution
1642              for  spatial  resolution by averaging the intensities of several
1643              neighboring pixels.  Images which suffer from severe  contouring
1644              when reducing colors can be improved with this option.
1645
1646              The -colors or -monochrome option is required for this option to
1647              take effect.
1648
1649              Use +dither to turn off dithering and to render PostScript with‐
1650              out text or graphic aliasing. Disabling dithering often (but not
1651              always) leads to decreased processing time.
1652
1653       -draw <string>
1654              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
1655
1656              Use this option to annotate an image with one  or  more  graphic
1657              primitives.   The  primitives  include shapes, text, transforma‐
1658              tions, and pixel operations.  The shape primitives are
1659
1660                   point           x,y
1661                   line            x0,y0 x1,y1
1662                   rectangle       x0,y0 x1,y1
1663                   roundRectangle  x0,y0 x1,y1 wc,hc
1664                   arc             x0,y0 x1,y1 a0,a1
1665                   ellipse         x0,y0 rx,ry a0,a1
1666                   circle          x0,y0 x1,y1
1667                   polyline        x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1668                   polygon         x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1669                   Bezier          x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1670                   path            path specification
1671                   image           operator x0,y0 w,h filename
1672
1673              The text primitive is
1674
1675                   text            x0,y0 string
1676
1677              The text gravity primitive is
1678
1679                   gravity         NorthWest, North, NorthEast, West, Center,
1680                                   East, SouthWest, South, or SouthEast
1681
1682              The text gravity primitive only affects the  placement  of  text
1683              and  does not interact with the other primitives.  It is equiva‐
1684              lent to using the -gravity commandline option, except that it is
1685              limited in scope to the -draw option in which it appears.
1686
1687              The transformation primitives are
1688
1689                   rotate          degrees
1690                   translate       dx,dy
1691                   scale           sx,sy
1692                   skewX           degrees
1693                   skewY           degrees
1694
1695              The pixel operation primitives are
1696
1697                   color           x0,y0 method
1698                   matte           x0,y0 method
1699
1700              The  shape  primitives  are  drawn in the color specified in the
1701              preceding -stroke option. Except for the line and  point  primi‐
1702              tives, they are filled with the color specified in the preceding
1703              -fill option.  For unfilled shapes, use -fill none.
1704
1705              Point requires a single coordinate.
1706
1707              Line requires a start and end coordinate.
1708
1709              Rectangle expects an upper left and lower right coordinate.
1710
1711              RoundRectangle has the upper left and  lower  right  coordinates
1712              and the width and height of the corners.
1713
1714              Circle  has  a  center coordinate and a coordinate for the outer
1715              edge.
1716
1717              Use Arc to inscribe an elliptical arc within a rectangle.   Arcs
1718              require  a start and end point as well as the degree of rotation
1719              (e.g. 130,30 200,100 45,90).
1720
1721              Use Ellipse to draw a partial  ellipse  centered  at  the  given
1722              point with the x-axis and y-axis radius and start and end of arc
1723              in degrees (e.g. 100,100 100,150 0,360).
1724
1725              Finally, polyline and polygon require three or more  coordinates
1726              to define its boundaries.  Coordinates are integers separated by
1727              an optional comma.  For example, to define a circle centered  at
1728              100,100 that extends to 150,150 use:
1729
1730                   -draw 'circle 100,100 150,150'
1731
1732              Paths (See Paths) represent an outline of an object which is de‐
1733              fined in terms of moveto (set a new current point), lineto (draw
1734              a  straight  line), curveto (draw a curve using a cubic Bezier),
1735              arc (elliptical or circular arc) and closepath (close  the  cur‐
1736              rent  shape by drawing a line to the last moveto) elements. Com‐
1737              pound paths (i.e., a path with subpaths, each  consisting  of  a
1738              single  moveto followed by one or more line or curve operations)
1739              are possible to allow effects such as "donut holes" in objects.
1740
1741              Use image to composite an image with another image.  Follow  the
1742              image keyword with the composite operator, image location, image
1743              size, and filename:
1744
1745                   -draw 'image Over 100,100 225,225 image.jpg'
1746
1747              You can use 0,0 for the image size, which means to use  the  ac‐
1748              tual dimensions found in the image header. Otherwise, it will be
1749              scaled to the given dimensions.  See -compose for a  description
1750              of the composite operators.
1751
1752              Use text to annotate an image with text. Follow the text coordi‐
1753              nates with a string. If the string has embedded spaces,  enclose
1754              it  in  single  or double quotes. Optionally you can include the
1755              image filename, type, width, height, or other image attribute by
1756              embedding special format character. See -comment for details.
1757
1758              For example,
1759
1760
1761                   -draw 'text 100,100 "%m:%f %wx%h"'
1762
1763
1764              annotates the image with MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image titled
1765              bird.miff
1766              and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
1767
1768              If the first character of string is @, the text is read
1769              from a file titled by the remaining characters in the string.  Please
1770              note that if the string comes from an untrusted source that it should
1771              be sanitized before use (a security risk).
1772
1773              Rotate rotates subsequent shape primitives and text primitives about
1774              the origin of the main image. If the -region option precedes the
1775              -draw option, the origin for transformations is the upper left
1776              corner of the region.
1777
1778              Translate translates them.
1779
1780              Scale scales them.
1781
1782              SkewX and SkewY skew them with respect to the origin of
1783              the main image or the region.
1784
1785              The transformations modify the current affine matrix, which is initialized
1786              from the initial affine matrix defined by the -affine option.
1787              Transformations are cumulative within the -draw option.
1788              The initial affine matrix is not affected; that matrix is only changed by the
1789              appearance of another -affine option.  If another -draw
1790              option appears, the current affine matrix is reinitialized from
1791              the initial affine matrix.
1792
1793              Use color to change the color of a pixel to the fill color (see
1794              -fill). Follow the pixel coordinate
1795              with a method:
1796
1797                   point
1798                   replace
1799                   floodfill
1800                   filltoborder
1801                   reset
1802
1803              Consider  the target pixel as that specified by your coordinate.
1804              The point method recolors the target pixel. The  replace  method
1805              recolors  any  pixel that matches the color of the target pixel.
1806              Floodfill recolors any pixel that matches the color of the  tar‐
1807              get  pixel  and is a neighbor, whereas filltoborder recolors any
1808              neighbor pixel that is not the border color. Finally, reset  re‐
1809              colors all pixels.
1810
1811              Use  matte  to  the change the pixel matte value to transparent.
1812              Follow the pixel coordinate with a method (see the color  primi‐
1813              tive for a description of methods). The point method changes the
1814              matte value of the target pixel. The replace method changes  the
1815              matte  value  of  any pixel that matches the color of the target
1816              pixel. Floodfill changes the  matte  value  of  any  pixel  that
1817              matches the color of the target pixel and is a neighbor, whereas
1818              filltoborder changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel  that
1819              is  not  the border color (-bordercolor).  Finally reset changes
1820              the matte value of all pixels.
1821
1822              You can set the primitive color, font,  and  font  bounding  box
1823              color with -fill, -font, and -box respectively. Options are pro‐
1824              cessed in command line order so be sure to use these options be‐
1825              fore the -draw option.
1826
1827       -edge <radius>
1828              detect edges within an image
1829
1830       -emboss <radius>
1831              emboss an image
1832
1833       -encoding <type>
1834              specify the text encoding
1835
1836              Choose from AdobeCustom, AdobeExpert, AdobeStandard, AppleRoman,
1837              BIG5, GB2312, Latin 2, None, SJIScode, Symbol, Unicode, Wansung.
1838
1839       -endian <type>
1840              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
1841
1842              MSB indicates big-endian (e.g. SPARC, Motorola  68K)  while  LSB
1843              indicates  little-endian  (e.g.  Intel 'x86, VAX) byte ordering.
1844              Native indicates to use the normal ordering for the current CPU.
1845              This  option currently only influences the CMYK, DPX, GRAY, RGB,
1846              and TIFF, formats.
1847
1848              Use +endian to revert to unspecified endianness.
1849
1850       -enhance
1851              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
1852
1853       -equalize
1854              perform histogram equalization to the image
1855
1856       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
1857              composite image on background color canvas image
1858
1859              This option composites the  image  on  a  new  background  color
1860              (-background)  canvas image of size <width>x<height>. The exist‐
1861              ing image content is composited at the position specified by ge‐
1862              ometry  x  and  y offset and/or desired gravity (-gravity) using
1863              the current image  compose  (-compose)  method.   Image  content
1864              which  falls  outside  the bounds of the new image dimensions is
1865              discarded.
1866
1867              For example, this command creates a thumbnail of an  image,  and
1868              centers  it on a red color backdrop image, offsetting the canvas
1869              ten pixels to the left and five pixels up, with respect  to  the
1870              thumbnail:
1871
1872                  gm convert infile.jpg -thumbnail 120x80 -background red -gravity center \
1873                            -extent 140x100-10-5 outfile.jpg
1874
1875              This  command  reduces  or  expands  a  JPEG  image to fit on an
1876              800x600 display:
1877
1878                  gm convert -size 800x600 input.jpg \
1879                            -resize 800x600 -background black \
1880                            -compose Copy -gravity center \
1881                            -extent 800x600 \
1882                            -quality 92 output.jpg
1883
1884              If the aspect ratio of the input image isn't exactly  4:3,  then
1885              the image is centered on an 800x600 black canvas.
1886
1887       -file <filename>
1888              write annotated difference image to file
1889
1890              If  -file  is  specified,  then an annotated difference image is
1891              generated and written to the specified file. Pixels which differ
1892              between the reference and compare images are modified from those
1893              in the compare image so that the changed pixels become more  ob‐
1894              vious.   Some images may require use of an alternative highlight
1895              style (see -highlight-style) or highlight color (see -highlight-
1896              color) before the changes are obvious.
1897
1898       -fill <color>
1899              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
1900
1901              Colors  are  represented in GraphicsMagick in the same form used
1902              by SVG. Use "gm convert -list color" to list named colors:
1903
1904                  name               (named color)
1905                  #RGB               (hex numbers, 4 bits each)
1906                  #RRGGBB            (8 bits each)
1907                  #RRRGGGBBB         (12 bits each)
1908                  #RRRRGGGGBBBB      (16 bits each)
1909                  #RGBA              (4 bits each)
1910                  #RRGGBBAA          (8 bits each)
1911                  #RRRGGGBBBAAA      (12 bits each)
1912                  #RRRRGGGGBBBBAAAA  (16 bits each)
1913                  rgb(r,g,b)         (r,g,b are decimal numbers)
1914                  rgba(r,g,b,a)      (r,g,b,a are decimal numbers)
1915
1916              Enclose the color specification in quotation  marks  to  prevent
1917              the "#" or the parentheses from being interpreted by your shell.
1918
1919              For example,
1920
1921                  gm convert -fill blue ...
1922                  gm convert -fill "#ddddff" ...
1923                  gm convert -fill "rgb(65000,65000,65535)" ...
1924
1925              The  shorter  forms  are scaled up, if necessary by replication.
1926              For example, #3af, #33aaff, and #3333aaaaffff  are  all  equiva‐
1927              lent.
1928
1929              See -draw for further details.
1930
1931       -filter <type>
1932              use this type of filter when resizing an image
1933
1934              Use  this  option  to  affect the resizing operation of an image
1935              (see -geometry).  Choose from these filters (ordered by approxi‐
1936              mate increasing CPU time):
1937
1938                   Point
1939                   Box
1940                   Triangle
1941                   Hermite
1942                   Hanning
1943                   Hamming
1944                   Blackman
1945                   Gaussian
1946                   Quadratic
1947                   Cubic
1948                   Catrom
1949                   Mitchell
1950                   Lanczos
1951                   Bessel
1952                   Sinc
1953
1954              The default filter is automatically selected to provide the best
1955              quality  while  consuming  a  reasonable  amount  of  time.  The
1956              Mitchell  filter  is  used if the image supports a palette, sup‐
1957              ports a matte channel, or is being enlarged, otherwise the Lanc‐
1958              zos filter is used.
1959
1960       -flatten
1961              flatten a sequence of images
1962
1963              In  some  file formats (e.g. Photoshop's PSD) complex images may
1964              be represented by "layers" (independent images)  which  must  be
1965              composited in order to obtain the final rendition.  The -flatten
1966              option accomplishes this composition.  The sequence of images is
1967              replaced  by a single image created by compositing each image in
1968              turn, while respecting composition operators and  page  offsets.
1969              While  -flatten is immediately useful for eliminating layers, it
1970              is also useful as a general-purpose composition tool.
1971
1972              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1973              option.   If  the -flatten option appears after all of the input
1974              images, all images are flattened.  Also  see  -mosaic  which  is
1975              similar  to -flatten except that it adds a suitably-sized canvas
1976              base image.
1977
1978              For example, this composites an image on top of a 640x400 trans‐
1979              parent black canvas image:
1980
1981                  gm convert -size 640x300 xc:transparent \
1982                            -compose over -page +0-100 \
1983                            frame.png -flatten output.png
1984
1985              and this flattens a Photoshop PSD file:
1986
1987                  gm convert input.psd -flatten output.png
1988
1989       -flip  create a "mirror image"
1990
1991              reflect the scanlines in the vertical direction.
1992
1993       -flop  create a "mirror image"
1994
1995              reflect the scanlines in the horizontal direction.
1996
1997       -font <name>
1998              use this font when annotating the image with text
1999
2000              You  can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
2001              Type, or X11 font.  For example, Arial.ttf is a  TrueType  font,
2002              ps:helvetica is PostScript, and x:fixed is X11.
2003
2004       -foreground <color>
2005              define the foreground color
2006
2007              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2008              -fill option.
2009
2010       -format <type>
2011              the image format type
2012
2013              When used with the mogrify utility, this option will convert any
2014              image  to  the  image format you specify.  See GraphicsMagick(1)
2015              for a list of image format types supported by GraphicsMagick, or
2016              see the output of 'gm -list format'.
2017
2018              By  default  the file is written to its original name.  However,
2019              if the filename extension matches a supported format, the exten‐
2020              sion is replaced with the image format type specified with -for‐
2021              mat.  For example, if you specify tiff as the  format  type  and
2022              the input image filename is image.gif, the output image filename
2023              becomes image.tiff.
2024
2025       -format <string>
2026              output formatted image characteristics
2027
2028              When used with the identify utility, or the convert utility with
2029              output  written to the 'info:-' file specification, use this op‐
2030              tion to print information about the image in a  format  of  your
2031              choosing.   You  can  include  the  image filename, type, width,
2032              height, Exif data, or other image attributes by  embedding  spe‐
2033              cial format characters:
2034
2035                   %b   file size
2036                   %c   comment
2037                   %d   directory
2038                   %e   filename extension
2039                   %f   filename
2040                   %g   page dimensions and offsets
2041                   %h   height
2042                   %i   input filename
2043                   %k   number of unique colors
2044                   %l   label
2045                   %m   magick
2046                   %n   number of scenes
2047                   %o   output filename
2048                   %p   page number
2049                   %q   image bit depth
2050                   %r   image type description
2051                   %s   scene number
2052                   %t   top of filename
2053                   %u   unique temporary filename
2054                   %w   width
2055                   %x   horizontal resolution
2056                   %y   vertical resolution
2057                   %A   transparency supported
2058                   %C   compression type
2059                   %D   GIF disposal method
2060                   %G   Original width and height
2061                   %H   page height
2062                   %M   original filename specification
2063                   %O   page offset (x,y)
2064                   %P   page dimensions (width,height)
2065                   %Q   compression quality
2066                   %T   time delay (in centi-seconds)
2067                   %U   resolution units
2068                   %W   page width
2069                   %X   page horizontal offset (x)
2070                   %Y   page vertical offset (y)
2071                   %@   trim bounding box
2072                   %#   signature
2073                   \n   newline
2074                   \r   carriage return
2075                   %%   %
2076
2077              For example,
2078
2079                   -format "%m:%f %wx%h"
2080
2081              displays  MIFF:bird.miff  512x480  for an image titled bird.miff
2082              and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2083
2084              If the first character of string is @, the format is read from a
2085              file  titled  by the remaining characters in the string.  Please
2086              note that if the string comes from an untrusted source  that  it
2087              should  be sanitized before use since this may be used to incor‐
2088              porate any readable file on the system (a security risk).
2089
2090              The values of image type (%r) which may be returned include:
2091
2092                   Bilevel
2093                   Grayscale
2094                   GrayscaleMatte
2095                   Palette
2096                   PaletteMatte
2097                   TrueColor
2098                   TrueColorMatte
2099                   ColorSeparation
2100                   ColorSeparationMatte
2101                   Optimize
2102
2103              You can also use the  following  special  formatting  syntax  to
2104              print Exif information contained in the file:
2105
2106                   %[EXIF:<tag>]
2107
2108              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2109
2110                   *  (print all Exif tags, in keyword=data format)
2111                   !  (print all Exif tags, in tag_number format)
2112                   #hhhh (print data for Exif tag #hhhh)
2113                   ImageWidth
2114                   ImageLength
2115                   BitsPerSample
2116                   Compression
2117                   PhotometricInterpretation
2118                   FillOrder
2119                   DocumentName
2120                   ImageDescription
2121                   Make
2122                   Model
2123                   StripOffsets
2124                   Orientation
2125                   SamplesPerPixel
2126                   RowsPerStrip
2127                   StripByteCounts
2128                   XResolution
2129                   YResolution
2130                   PlanarConfiguration
2131                   ResolutionUnit
2132                   TransferFunction
2133                   Software
2134                   DateTime
2135                   Artist
2136                   WhitePoint
2137                   PrimaryChromaticities
2138                   TransferRange
2139                   JPEGProc
2140                   JPEGInterchangeFormat
2141                   JPEGInterchangeFormatLength
2142                   YCbCrCoefficients
2143                   YCbCrSubSampling
2144                   YCbCrPositioning
2145                   ReferenceBlackWhite
2146                   CFARepeatPatternDim
2147                   CFAPattern
2148                   BatteryLevel
2149                   Copyright
2150                   ExposureTime
2151                   FNumber
2152                   IPTC/NAA
2153                   ExifOffset
2154                   InterColorProfile
2155                   ExposureProgram
2156                   SpectralSensitivity
2157                   GPSInfo
2158                   ISOSpeedRatings
2159                   OECF
2160                   ExifVersion
2161                   DateTimeOriginal
2162                   DateTimeDigitized
2163                   ComponentsConfiguration
2164                   CompressedBitsPerPixel
2165                   ShutterSpeedValue
2166                   ApertureValue
2167                   BrightnessValue
2168                   ExposureBiasValue
2169                   MaxApertureValue
2170                   SubjectDistance
2171                   MeteringMode
2172                   LightSource
2173                   Flash
2174                   FocalLength
2175                   MakerNote
2176                   UserComment
2177                   SubSecTime
2178                   SubSecTimeOriginal
2179                   SubSecTimeDigitized
2180                   FlashPixVersion
2181                   ColorSpace
2182                   ExifImageWidth
2183                   ExifImageLength
2184                   InteroperabilityOffset
2185                   FlashEnergy
2186                   SpatialFrequencyResponse
2187                   FocalPlaneXResolution
2188                   FocalPlaneYResolution
2189                   FocalPlaneResolutionUnit
2190                   SubjectLocation
2191                   ExposureIndex
2192                   SensingMethod
2193                   FileSource
2194                   SceneType
2195
2196              JPEG  specific information (from reading a JPEG file) may be ob‐
2197              tained like this:
2198
2199                   %[JPEG-<tag>]
2200
2201              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2202
2203                   *                 (all JPEG-related tags, in
2204                                      keyword=data format)
2205                   Quality           IJG JPEG "quality" estimate
2206                   Colorspace        JPEG colorspace numeric ID
2207                   Colorspace-Name   JPEG colorspace name
2208                   Sampling-factors  JPEG sampling factors
2209
2210              Please note that JPEG has no notion of "quality"  and  that  the
2211              quality  metric  used by, and estimated by the software is based
2212              on the quality metric established by IJG  JPEG  6b.   Other  en‐
2213              coders  (e.g. that used by Adobe Photoshop) use different encod‐
2214              ing metrics.
2215
2216              Surround the format specification with quotation marks  to  pre‐
2217              vent  your  shell  from  misinterpreting  any  spaces and square
2218              brackets.
2219
2220       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
2221              surround the image with an ornamental border
2222
2223              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.  The
2224              -frame option is not affected by the -gravity option.
2225
2226              The  color  of the border is specified with the -mattecolor com‐
2227              mand line option.
2228
2229       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
2230
2231       -fuzz <distance>{%}
2232              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
2233
2234              A number of algorithms search for a target color. By default the
2235              color  must  be  exact. Use this option to match colors that are
2236              close (in Euclidean distance) to the  target  color  in  RGB  3D
2237              space.  For example, if you want to automatically trim the edges
2238              of an image with -trim but the image was scanned and the  target
2239              background  color  may differ by a small amount. This option can
2240              account for these differences.
2241
2242              The distance can be in absolute intensity units or, by appending
2243              "%",  as  a  percentage  of the maximum possible intensity (255,
2244              65535, or 4294967295).
2245
2246       -gamma <value>
2247              level of gamma correction
2248
2249              The same color image displayed on two different workstations may
2250              look  different  due  to differences in the display monitor. Use
2251              gamma correction to adjust for this color difference. Reasonable
2252              values  extend  from 0.8 to 2.3. Gamma less than 1.0 darkens the
2253              image and gamma greater than 1.0 lightens it. Large  adjustments
2254              to  image gamma may result in the loss of some image information
2255              if the pixel quantum size is only eight bits (quantum range 0 to
2256              255).
2257
2258              You  can apply separate gamma values to the red, green, and blue
2259              channels of the image with a gamma  value  list  delimited  with
2260              slashes (e.g., 1.7/2.3/1.2).
2261
2262              Use  +gamma  value to set the image gamma level without actually
2263              adjusting the image pixels. This option is useful if  the  image
2264              is  of a known gamma but not set as an image attribute (e.g. PNG
2265              images).
2266
2267       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
2268              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
2269
2270              Use the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
2271
2272       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
2273              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
2274
2275              The -geometry option is used for a number of different purposes,
2276              depending on the utility it is used with.
2277
2278              For  the  X11  commands ('animate', 'display', and 'import'), it
2279              specifies the preferred size and location of the  Image  window.
2280              By  default,  the window size is the image size and the location
2281              is chosen by you (or your window manager) when it is mapped.
2282               For the 'import', 'convert', 'mogrify' utility commands it  may
2283              be  used to specify the desired size when resizing an image.  In
2284              this case, symbols representing resize options may  be  appended
2285              to  the  geometry  string to influence how the resize request is
2286              treated.
2287
2288              See later notes corresponding to usage by  particular  commands.
2289              The following notes apply to when -geometry is used to express a
2290              resize request, taking into account the  current  properties  of
2291              the image.
2292
2293              By  default,  the  width and height are maximum values. That is,
2294              the image is expanded or contracted to fit the width and  height
2295              value while maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.
2296
2297              Append  a  ^  to  the geometry so that the image aspect ratio is
2298              maintained when the image is resized, but the resulting width or
2299              height are treated as minimum values rather than maximum values.
2300
2301              Append  a ! (exclamation point) to the geometry to force the im‐
2302              age size to exactly the size you specify. For  example,  if  you
2303              specify 640x480! the image width is set to 640 pixels and height
2304              to 480.
2305
2306              If only the width is specified, without the trailing  'x',  then
2307              height  is set to width (e.g., -geometry 100 is the same as -ge‐
2308              ometry 100x100).  If only the width is specified  but  with  the
2309              trailing  'x',  then  width  assumes the value and the height is
2310              chosen to maintain the aspect ratio of the image.  Similarly, if
2311              only  the  height  is specified prefixed by 'x' (e.g., -geometry
2312              x256), the width is chosen to maintain the aspect ratio.
2313
2314              To specify a percentage width or height instead, append  %.  The
2315              image  size is multiplied by the width and height percentages to
2316              obtain the final image dimensions. To increase the  size  of  an
2317              image,  use a value greater than 100 (e.g. 125%). To decrease an
2318              image's size, use a percentage less than 100.
2319
2320              Use @ to specify the maximum area in pixels of an image.
2321
2322              Use > to change the dimensions of the image only if its width or
2323              height  exceeds  the geometry specification. < resizes the image
2324              only if both of its dimensions are less than the geometry speci‐
2325              fication.  For  example, if you specify '640x480>' and the image
2326              size is 256x256, the image size does not change. However, if the
2327              image  is  512x512  or 1024x1024, it is resized to 480x480.  En‐
2328              close the geometry specification in quotation marks  to  prevent
2329              the  < or > from being interpreted by your shell as a file redi‐
2330              rection.
2331
2332              When used with animate and display, offsets are handled  in  the
2333              same  manner as in X(1) and the -gravity option is not used.  If
2334              the x is negative, the offset  is  measured  leftward  from  the
2335              right  edge  of  the screen to the right edge of the image being
2336              displayed.  Similarly, negative y is measured between the bottom
2337              edges.   The  offsets  are  not affected by "%"; they are always
2338              measured in pixels.
2339
2340              When used as a composite option, -geometry gives the  dimensions
2341              of  the image and its location with respect to the composite im‐
2342              age.  If the -gravity option is present with NorthEast, East, or
2343              SouthEast  gravity, the x represents the distance from the right
2344              edge of the image to the right  edge  of  the  composite  image.
2345              Similarly,  if  the  -gravity  option is present with SouthWest,
2346              South, or SouthEast gravity, y is measured  between  the  bottom
2347              edges.  Accordingly,  a  positive offset will never point in the
2348              direction outside of the image.  The offsets are not affected by
2349              "%";  they are always measured in pixels.  To specify the dimen‐
2350              sions of the composite image, use the -resize option.
2351
2352              When used as a convert, import or mogrify option,  -geometry  is
2353              synonymous with -resize and specifies the size of the output im‐
2354              age.  The offsets, if present, are ignored.
2355
2356              When used as a montage option,  -geometry  specifies  the  image
2357              size  and  border  size  for  each tile; default is 256x256+0+0.
2358              Negative  offsets  (border  dimensions)  are  meaningless.   The
2359              -gravity  option  affects  the placement of the image within the
2360              tile; the default gravity for this purpose is  Center.   If  the
2361              "%" sign appears in the geometry specification, the tile size is
2362              the specified percentage of the original dimensions of the first
2363              tile.  To specify the dimensions of the montage, use the -resize
2364              option.
2365
2366       -gravity <type>
2367              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
2368
2369              Choices are: NorthWest, North, NorthEast,  West,  Center,  East,
2370              SouthWest, South, SouthEast.
2371
2372              The  direction  you  choose specifies where to position the text
2373              when annotating the image. For example Center gravity forces the
2374              text  to  be  centered  within  the image. By default, the image
2375              gravity is NorthWest.  See -draw for more details about  graphic
2376              primitives.  Only the text primitive is affected by the -gravity
2377              option.
2378
2379              The -gravity option is also used in concert with  the  -geometry
2380              option  and  other  options that take <geometry> as a parameter,
2381              such as the -crop option.  See -geometry for details of how  the
2382              -gravity  option  interacts with the <x> and <y> parameters of a
2383              geometry specification.
2384
2385              When used as an option to composite, -gravity gives  the  direc‐
2386              tion that the image gravitates within the composite.
2387
2388              When  used as an option to montage, -gravity gives the direction
2389              that an image gravitates within a tile.  The default gravity  is
2390              Center for this purpose.
2391
2392       -green-primary <x>,<y>
2393              green chromaticity primary point
2394
2395       -hald-clut <clut>
2396              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
2397
2398              A  Hald  CLUT  ("Color Look-Up Table") is a special square color
2399              image which contains a look-up table for red, green,  and  blue.
2400              The size of the Hald CLUT image is determined by its order.  The
2401              width (and height) of a Hald CLUT is the cube of the order.  For
2402              example,  a Hald CLUT of order 8 is 512x512 pixels (262,144 col‐
2403              ors) and of order 16 is 4096x4096 (16,777,216 colors).   A  spe‐
2404              cial  CLUT  is the identity CLUT which which causes no change to
2405              the input image.  In order to use the Hald CLUT,  one  takes  an
2406              identity  CLUT and adjusts its colors in some way.  The modified
2407              CLUT can then be used to transform any number of  images  in  an
2408              identical way.
2409
2410              GraphicsMagick  contains  a built-in identity CLUT generator via
2411              the IDENTITY coder.  For example  reading  from  the  file  name
2412              IDENTITY:8  returns  an  identity CLUT of order 8.  Typical Hald
2413              CLUT identity images have an order of between 8 and 16.  The de‐
2414              fault order for the IDENTITY CLUT generator is 8.  Interpolation
2415              is used so it is not usually necessary for  CLUT  images  to  be
2416              very  large.  The PNG file format is ideal for storing Hald CLUT
2417              images because it compresses them very well.
2418
2419       -help  print usage instructions
2420
2421       -highlight-color <color>
2422              pixel annotation color
2423
2424              Specifies the color to use when annotating difference pixels.
2425
2426       -highlight-style <style>
2427              pixel annotation style
2428
2429              Specifies the pixel difference annotation style used to draw at‐
2430              tention  to  changed  pixels.  May  be one of Assign, Threshold,
2431              Tint, or XOR; where Assign replaces the pixel with the highlight
2432              color  (see -highlight-color), Threshold replaces the pixel with
2433              black or white based on the difference in intensity, Tint  alpha
2434              tints  the  pixel  with the highlight color, and XOR does an XOR
2435              between the pixel and the highlight color.
2436
2437       -iconGeometry <geometry>
2438              specify the icon geometry
2439
2440              Offsets, if present in the geometry specification,  are  handled
2441              in  the  same manner as the -geometry option, using X11 style to
2442              handle negative offsets.
2443
2444       -iconic
2445              iconic animation
2446
2447       -immutable
2448              make image immutable
2449
2450       -implode <factor>
2451              implode image pixels about the center
2452
2453       -intent <type>
2454              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
2455
2456              Use this option to affect the the color management operation  of
2457              an  image  (see -profile).  Choose from these intents: Absolute,
2458              Perceptual, Relative, Saturation.
2459
2460              The default intent is undefined.
2461
2462       -interlace <type>
2463              the type of interlacing scheme
2464
2465              Choices are: None, Line, Plane, or  Partition.  The  default  is
2466              None.
2467
2468              This  option  is  used to specify the type of interlacing scheme
2469              for raw image formats such as RGB or YUV.  None means do not in‐
2470              terlace (RGBRGBRGBRGBRGBRGB...),
2471
2472              Line             uses            scanline            interlacing
2473              (RRR...GGG...BBB...RRR...GGG...BBB...), and Plane uses plane in‐
2474              terlacing (RRRRRR...GGGGGG...BBBBBB...).
2475
2476              Partition is like plane except the different planes are saved to
2477              individual files (e.g. image.R, image.G, and image.B).
2478
2479              Use Line to create an interlaced PNG or  GIF or progressive JPEG
2480              image.
2481
2482       -label <name>
2483              assign a label to an image
2484
2485              Use  this  option  to assign a specific label to the image, when
2486              writing to an image format that supports labels, such  as  TIFF,
2487              PNG,  MIFF,  or  PostScript. You can include the the image file‐
2488              name, type, width, height, or other image attribute by embedding
2489              special  format  character.   A label is not drawn on the image,
2490              but is embedded in the image datastream via  a  "Label"  tag  or
2491              similar  mechanism.   If you want the label to be visible on the
2492              image itself, use the -draw option.  See -comment for details.
2493
2494              For example,
2495
2496                   -label "%m:%f %wx%h"
2497
2498              produces an image label of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for  an  image
2499              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2500
2501              If  the  first character of string is @, the image label is read
2502              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
2503              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
2504              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
2505              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file might be incorporated into
2506              the image label (a security risk).
2507
2508              If the -label option appears multiple times, only the last label
2509              is stored.
2510
2511              In  PNG images, the label is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk with
2512              the keyword "label".
2513
2514              When converting to PostScript, use  this  option  to  specify  a
2515              header  string  to print above the image. Specify the label font
2516              with -font.
2517
2518              When creating a montage, by default the label associated with an
2519              image  is  displayed with the corresponding tile in the montage.
2520              Use the +label option to suppress this behavior.
2521
2522
2523
2524       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
2525              perform local adaptive thresholding
2526
2527              Perform local adaptive thresholding using the  specified  width,
2528              height,  and  offset.   The offset is a distance in sample space
2529              from the mean, as an absolute integer ranging from 0 to the max‐
2530              imum  sample value or as a percentage.  If the percent option is
2531              supplied, then the offset is computed as  a  percentage  of  the
2532              quantum  range.   It  is strongly recommended to use the percent
2533              option so that results are not sensitive to pixel quantum depth.
2534
2535              For example,
2536
2537                   -colorspace gray -lat "10x10-5%"
2538
2539              will help clarify a scanned grayscale or color document, produc‐
2540              ing a bi-level equivalent.
2541
2542       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
2543              adjust the level of image contrast
2544
2545              Give  one,  two  or  three  values delimited with commas: black-
2546              point, gamma, white-point (e.g. 10,1.0,250 or  2%,0.5,98%).  The
2547              black and white points range from 0 to MaxRGB or from 0 to 100%;
2548              if the white point is omitted it is set  to  MaxRGB-black_point.
2549              If  a  "%" sign is present anywhere in the string, the black and
2550              white points are percentages of MaxRGB.  Gamma  is  an  exponent
2551              that  ranges  from  0.1 to 10.; if it is omitted, the default of
2552              1.0 (no gamma correction) is assumed. This interface works simi‐
2553              lar  to Photoshop's "Image->Adjustments->Levels..."  "Input Lev‐
2554              els" interface.
2555
2556       -limit <type> <value>
2557              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
2558              resource limit
2559
2560              By default, resource limits are estimated based on the available
2561              resources and capabilities of the system.  The  resource  limits
2562              are  Disk, maximum total disk space consumed; File, maximum num‐
2563              ber of file descriptors allowed to be open at once; Map, maximum
2564              total  number  of file bytes which may be memory mapped; Memory,
2565              maximum total number of bytes of  heap  memory  used  for  image
2566              storage; Pixels, maximum absolute image size (per image); Width,
2567              maximum image pixels width; Height, maximum image pixels height;
2568              Read, maximum number of uncompressed bytes to read; and Threads,
2569              the maximum number of worker threads to use  per  OpenMP  thread
2570              team.
2571
2572              The  Disk  and  Map resource limits are used to decide if (for a
2573              given image) the decoded image ("pixel cache") should be  stored
2574              in heap memory (RAM), in a memory-mapped disk file, or in a disk
2575              file accessed via read/write I/O.
2576
2577              The number of total pixels in one  image  (Pixels),  and/or  the
2578              width/height  (Width/Height),  may  be limited in order to force
2579              the reading, or creation of images larger  than  the  limit  (in
2580              pixels) to intentionally fail. The disk limit (Disk) establishes
2581              an overall limit since using the disk is the means of  last  re‐
2582              sort.  When  the disk limit has been reached, no more images may
2583              be read.
2584
2585              The amount of uncompressed data read when reading one image  may
2586              be  limited by the Read limit.  Reading the image fails when the
2587              limit is hit.  This option is useful if the data is read from  a
2588              stream  (pipe) or from a compressed file such as a gzipped file.
2589              Some files are very compressable and so a small compressed  file
2590              can  decompress  to a huge amount of data.  This option also de‐
2591              fends against files which produce seemingly endless loops  while
2592              decoding by seeking backwards in the file.
2593
2594              The  value  argument is an absolute value, but may have standard
2595              binary suffix characters applied ('K', 'M', 'G', 'T', 'P',  'E')
2596              to apply a scaling to the value (based on a multiplier of 1024).
2597              Any additional characters are ignored. For example, '-limit Pix‐
2598              els  10MP'  limits  the  maximum image size to 10 megapixels and
2599              '-limit memory 32MB -limit map 64MB' limits  memory  and  memory
2600              mapped files to 32 megabytes and 64 megabytes respectively.
2601
2602              Resource limits may also be set using environment variables. The
2603              environment  variables  MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK,   MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES,
2604              MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP, MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY, MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS, MAG‐
2605              ICK_LIMIT_WIDTH,  MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT.   MAGICK_LIMIT_READ,  and
2606              OMP_NUM_THREADS  may  be  used to set the limits for disk space,
2607              open files, memory mapped size, heap memory,  per-image  pixels,
2608              image width, image height, and threads respectively.
2609
2610              Use the option -list resource list the current limits.
2611
2612       -linewidth
2613              the line width for subsequent draw operations
2614
2615       -list <type>
2616              the type of list
2617
2618              Choices  are:  Color, Delegate, Format, Magic, Module, Resource,
2619              or Type. The Module option is only available  if  GraphicsMagick
2620              was built to support loadable modules.
2621
2622              This  option lists information about the GraphicsMagick configu‐
2623              ration.
2624
2625       -log <string>
2626              Specify format for debug log
2627
2628              This option specifies the format for the log  printed  when  the
2629              -debug option is active.
2630
2631              You  can  display  the following components by embedding special
2632              format characters:
2633
2634                   %d   domain
2635                   %e   event
2636                   %f   function
2637                   %l   line
2638                   %m   module
2639                   %p   process ID
2640                   %r   real CPU time
2641                   %t   wall clock time
2642                   %u   user CPU time
2643                   %%   percent sign
2644                   \n   newline
2645                   \r   carriage return
2646
2647              For example:
2648
2649                  gm convert -debug coders -log "%u %m:%l %e" in.gif out.png
2650
2651              The default behavior is to print all of the components.
2652
2653       -loop <iterations>
2654              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
2655
2656              A value other than zero forces the animation to repeat itself up
2657              to iterations times.
2658
2659       -magnify
2660              magnify the image
2661
2662              The image size is doubled using linear interpolation.
2663
2664       -magnify <factor>
2665              magnify the image
2666
2667              The displayed image is magnified by factor.
2668
2669       -map <filename>
2670              choose a particular set of colors from this image
2671
2672              [convert or mogrify]
2673
2674              By  default,  color  reduction  chooses an optimal set of colors
2675              that best represent the original image. Alternatively,  you  can
2676              choose  a  particular set of colors from an image file with this
2677              option.
2678
2679              Use +map to reduce all images in the image sequence that follows
2680              to  a  single  optimal set of colors that best represent all the
2681              images.  The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance
2682              of  any option.  If the +map option appears after all of the in‐
2683              put images, all images are mapped.
2684
2685       -map <type>
2686              display image using this type.
2687
2688              [animate or display]
2689
2690              Choose from these Standard Colormap types:
2691
2692                   best
2693                   default
2694                   gray
2695                   red
2696                   green
2697                   blue
2698
2699              The X server must support the Standard Colormap you choose, oth‐
2700              erwise  an  error  occurs.  Use  list  as  the  type and display
2701              searches the list of colormap types in top-to-bottom order until
2702              one is located. See xstdcmap(1) for one way of creating Standard
2703              Colormaps.
2704
2705       -mask <filename>
2706              Specify a clipping mask
2707
2708              The image read from the file is used as  a  clipping  mask.   It
2709              must have the same dimensions as the image being masked.
2710
2711              If  the  mask  image contains an opacity channel, the opacity of
2712              each pixel is used to define the mask.  Otherwise, the intensity
2713              (gray level) of each pixel is used.  Unmasked (black) pixels are
2714              modified while masked pixels (not black) are protected from  al‐
2715              teration.
2716
2717              Use +mask to remove the clipping mask.
2718
2719              It  is not necessary to use -clip to activate the mask; -clip is
2720              implied by -mask.
2721
2722       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
2723
2724              If the image does not have a matte  channel,  create  an  opaque
2725              one.
2726
2727              Use +matte to ignore the matte channel (treats it as opaque) and
2728              to avoid writing a matte channel in the output file.
2729
2730              For the compare command, -matte will add an opaque matte channel
2731              to images if they do not already have a matte channel, and matte
2732              will be enabled for both images.  Likewise, if +matte  is  used,
2733              the  matte  channel  is disabled for both images.  This makes it
2734              easier to compare images regardless of if they  already  have  a
2735              matte channel.
2736
2737       -mattecolor <color>
2738              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
2739
2740              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2741              -fill option.
2742
2743       -maximum-error <limit>
2744              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
2745
2746              Specifies the maximum amount of total image error (based on com‐
2747              parison  using  a specified metric) before an error ("image dif‐
2748              ference exceeds limit") is reported.  The error is reported  via
2749              a non-zero command execution return status.
2750
2751       -median <radius>
2752              apply a median filter to the image
2753
2754       -metric <metric>
2755              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
2756
2757       -minify <factor>
2758              minify the image
2759
2760              The image size is halved using linear interpolation.
2761
2762       -mode <value>
2763              mode of operation
2764
2765              The  available  montage modes are frame to place the images in a
2766              rectangular grid while adding  a  decorative  frame  with  drop‐
2767              shadow,  unframe  to  place  undecorated images in a rectangular
2768              grid, and concatenate to pack the images closely together  with‐
2769              out any well-defined grid or decoration.
2770
2771       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
2772              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
2773
2774              Specify  the percent change in brightness, color saturation, and
2775              hue separated by commas. Default argument values  are  100  per‐
2776              cent, resulting in no change. For example, to increase the color
2777              brightness by 20% and decrease the color saturation by  10%  and
2778              leave the hue unchanged, use: -modulate 120,90.
2779
2780              Hue  is the percentage of absolute rotation from the current po‐
2781              sition. For example 50 results in a  counter-clockwise  rotation
2782              of  90  degrees,  150  results in a clockwise rotation of 90 de‐
2783              grees, with 0 and 200 both resulting in a rotation  of  180  de‐
2784              grees.
2785
2786       -monitor
2787              show progress indication
2788
2789              A  simple  command-line  progress  indication is shown while the
2790              command is running. The process indication shows  the  operation
2791              currently  being  performed  and the percent completed. Commands
2792              using X11 may replace the command line progress indication  with
2793              a graphical one once an image has been displayed.
2794
2795       -monochrome
2796              transform the image to black and white
2797
2798       -morph <frames>
2799              morphs an image sequence
2800
2801              Both the image pixels and size are linearly interpolated to give
2802              the appearance of a meta-morphosis from one image to the next.
2803
2804              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
2805              option.  If the -morph option appears after all of the input im‐
2806              ages, all images are morphed.
2807
2808       -mosaic
2809              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
2810
2811              The -mosaic option provides a flexible way to composite  one  or
2812              more images onto a solid-color canvas image. It works similar to
2813              -flatten except that a base canvas image is  automatically  cre‐
2814              ated with a suitable size given the image size, page dimensions,
2815              and page offsets of images to be composited.  The color  of  the
2816              base  canvas  image  may be set via the -background option.  The
2817              default canvas color is 'white', but  'black'  or  'transparent'
2818              may  be more suitable depending on the composition algorithm re‐
2819              quested.
2820
2821              The -compose option may be used to specify the composition algo‐
2822              rithm  to  use when compositing the subsequent image on the base
2823              canvas.
2824
2825              The -page option can be used to establish the dimensions of  the
2826              mosaic  and  to position the subsequent image within the mosaic.
2827              If the -page argument does not specify width  and  height,  then
2828              the canvas dimensions are evaluated based on the image sizes and
2829              offsets.
2830
2831              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
2832              option.   If  the  -mosaic option appears after all of the input
2833              images, all images are included in the mosaic.
2834
2835              The following is an example of composing an image based on  red,
2836              green,  and  blue layers extracted from a sequence of images and
2837              pasted on the canvas image at specified offsets:
2838
2839                  gm convert -background black \
2840                            -compose CopyRed   -page +0-100 red.png \
2841                            -compose CopyGreen -page +0+40  green.png \
2842                            -compose CopyBlue  -page +0+180 blue.png \
2843                            -mosaic output.png
2844
2845       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
2846              Simulate motion blur
2847
2848              Simulate motion blur by convolving the image with a Gaussian op‐
2849              erator  of  the given radius and standard deviation (sigma). For
2850              reasonable results, radius should be larger than sigma.  If  ra‐
2851              dius  is  zero, then a suitable radius is automatically selected
2852              based on sigma. The angle specifies the angle that the object is
2853              coming from (side which is blurred).
2854
2855       -name  name an image
2856
2857       -negate
2858              replace every pixel with its complementary color
2859
2860              The  red,  green,  and blue intensities of an image are negated.
2861              White becomes black, yellow becomes blue, etc.  Use  +negate  to
2862              only negate the grayscale pixels of the image.
2863
2864       -noise <radius|type>
2865              add or reduce noise in an image
2866
2867              The  principal  function  of noise peak elimination filter is to
2868              smooth the objects within an image without losing edge  informa‐
2869              tion and without creating undesired structures. The central idea
2870              of the algorithm is to replace a pixel with its next neighbor in
2871              value  within a pixel window, if this pixel has been found to be
2872              noise. A pixel is defined as noise if and only if this pixel  is
2873              a maximum or minimum within the pixel window.
2874
2875              Use radius to specify the width of the neighborhood.
2876
2877              Use  +noise  followed  by a noise type to add noise to an image.
2878              The noise added modulates the existing image pixels. Choose from
2879              these noise types:
2880
2881                   Uniform
2882                   Gaussian
2883                   Multiplicative
2884                   Impulse
2885                   Laplacian
2886                   Poisson
2887                   Random (uniform distribution)
2888
2889       -noop  NOOP (no option)
2890
2891              The  -noop option can be used to terminate a group of images and
2892              reset all options to their default values, when no other  option
2893              is desired.
2894
2895       -normalize
2896              transform image to span the full range of color values
2897
2898              This is a contrast enhancement technique based on the image his‐
2899              togram.
2900
2901              When computing the contrast enhancement  values,  the  histogram
2902              edges are truncated so that the majority of the image pixels are
2903              considered in the constrast enhancement, and outliers (e.g. ran‐
2904              dom  noise  or minute details) are ignored.  The default is that
2905              0.1 percent of the histogram entries are ignored.  The  percent‐
2906              age  of  the  histogram  to ignore may be specified by using the
2907              -set option with the histogram-threshold  parameter  similar  to
2908              -set  histogram-threshold  0.01  to specify 0.01 percent.  Use 0
2909              percent to use the entire histogram,  with  possibly  diminished
2910              contrast enhancement.
2911
2912       -opaque <color>
2913              change this color to the pen color within the image
2914
2915              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2916              -fill option.  The color is replaced if it is identical  to  the
2917              target  color, or close enough to the target color in a 3D space
2918              as defined by the Euclidean distance specified by -fuzz.
2919
2920              See -fill and -fuzz for more details.
2921
2922       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
2923              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
2924              channel
2925
2926              Apply  a low-level mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to a
2927              selected image channel or all image channels.  Operations  which
2928              result  in  negative  results  are reset to zero, and operations
2929              which overflow the available range are reset to the maximum pos‐
2930              sible value.
2931
2932              Select  a  channel from: Red, Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan,
2933              Magenta, Yellow, Black, All, or  Gray.  All  only  modifies  the
2934              color  channels  and does not modify the Opacity channel. Except
2935              for the threshold operators, All operates on each channel  inde‐
2936              pendently so that operations are on a per-channel basis.
2937
2938              Gray treats the color channels as a grayscale intensity and per‐
2939              forms the requested operation on the equivalent pixel  intensity
2940              so  the  result  is  a gray image.  Select an operator from Add,
2941              And, Assign, Depth, Divide, Gamma,  Negate,  LShift,  Log,  Max,
2942              Min,  Multiply, Or, Pow, RShift, Subtract, Threshold, Threshold-
2943              White, Threshold-White-Negate, Threshold-Black, Threshold-Black-
2944              Negate,  Xor,  Noise-Gaussian,  Noise-Impulse,  Noise-Laplacian,
2945              Noise-Multiplicative, Noise-Poisson,  Noise-Random,  and  Noise-
2946              Uniform.
2947
2948              Rvalue  may  be  any  floating  point or integer value. Normally
2949              rvalue will be in the range of 0 to MaxRGB, where MaxRGB is  the
2950              largest  quantum  value  supported  by  the GraphicsMagick build
2951              (255, 65535, or 4294967295) but values outside  this  range  are
2952              useful  for some arithmetic operations.  Arguments to logical or
2953              bit-wise operations are rounded to  a  positive  integral  value
2954              prior  to  use. If a percent (%) symbol is appended to the argu‐
2955              ment, then the argument has a range of 0 to 100 percent.
2956
2957              The following is a description of the operators:
2958
2959
2960               Add
2961
2962                    Result is rvalue added to channel value.
2963
2964               And
2965
2966                    Result is the logical AND of rvalue with channel value.
2967
2968               Assign
2969
2970                    Result is rvalue.
2971
2972               Depth
2973
2974                    Result is channel value adjusted so that it  may  be  (ap‐
2975                    proximately)  stored in the specified number of bits with‐
2976                    out additional loss.
2977
2978               Divide
2979
2980                    Result is channel value divided by rvalue.
2981
2982               Gamma
2983
2984                    Result is channel value gamma adjusted by rvalue.
2985
2986               LShift
2987
2988                    Result is channel value bitwise  left  shifted  by  rvalue
2989                    bits.
2990
2991               Log
2992
2993                    Result is computed as log(value*rvalue+1)/log(rvalue+1).
2994
2995               Max
2996
2997                    Result  is  assigned  to  rvalue if rvalue is greater than
2998                    value.
2999
3000               Min
3001
3002                    Result is assigned to rvalue if rvalue is less than value.
3003
3004               Multiply
3005
3006                    Result is channel value multiplied by rvalue.
3007
3008               Negate
3009
3010                    Result is inverse of channel value (like a film negative).
3011                    An  rvalue must be supplied but is currently not used. In‐
3012                    verting the image twice results in the original image.
3013
3014               Or
3015
3016                    Result is the logical OR of rvalue with channel value.
3017
3018               Pow
3019
3020                    Result is computed as pow(value,rvalue). Similar to  Gamma
3021                    except that rvalue is not inverted.
3022
3023               RShift
3024
3025                    Result  is  channel  value bitwise right shifted by rvalue
3026                    bits.
3027
3028               Subtract
3029
3030                    Result is channel value minus rvalue.
3031
3032               Threshold
3033
3034                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3035                    rvalue,  or minimum (black) if it is less than or equal to
3036                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3037                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3038
3039               Threshold-white
3040
3041                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3042                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is less  than  or  equal  to
3043                    rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise from the
3044                    bright parts of an image. If all channels  are  specified,
3045                    then  thresholding  is done based on computed pixel inten‐
3046                    sity.
3047
3048               Threshold-White-Negate
3049
3050                    Result is set to black if channel value  is  greater  than
3051                    rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is less than or equal to
3052                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3053                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3054
3055               Threshold-black
3056
3057                    Result  is  minimum  (black) if channel value is less than
3058                    than rvalue and is unchanged if  it  is  greater  than  or
3059                    equal to rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise
3060                    from the dark parts of an image. If all channels are spec‐
3061                    ified,  then  thresholding is done based on computed pixel
3062                    intensity.
3063
3064               Threshold-Black-Negate
3065
3066                    Result is set to white if channel value is less than  than
3067                    rvalue  and is unchanged if it is greater than or equal to
3068                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3069                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3070
3071               Xor
3072
3073                    Result is the logical XOR of rvalue with channel value. An
3074                    interesting property of XOR is that  performing  the  same
3075                    operation twice results in the original value.
3076
3077               Noise-Gaussian
3078
3079                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with gauss‐
3080                    ian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3081
3082               Noise-Impulse
3083
3084                    Result is the current channel value modulated with impulse
3085                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3086
3087               Noise-Laplacian
3088
3089                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with lapla‐
3090                    cian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3091
3092               Noise-Multiplicative
3093
3094                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  multi‐
3095                    plicative gaussian noise according to the intensity speci‐
3096                    fied by rvalue.
3097
3098               Noise-Poisson
3099
3100                    Result is the current channel value modulated with poisson
3101                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3102
3103               Noise-Random
3104
3105                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with random
3106                    (uniform distribution) noise according  to  the  intensity
3107                    specified   by   rvalue.    The  initial  noise  intensity
3108                    (rvalue=1.0) is the range of one pixel quantum span.
3109
3110               Noise-Uniform
3111
3112                    Result is the channel value with uniform noise applied ac‐
3113                    cording to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118               As  an  example, the Assign operator assigns a fixed value to a
3119               channel. For example, this command sets the red channel to  the
3120               mid-range value:
3121
3122                   gm convert in.bmp -operator red assign "50%" out.bmp
3123
3124               The following applies 50% thresholding to the image and returns
3125               a gray image:
3126
3127                   gm convert in.bmp -operator gray threshold "50%" out.bmp
3128
3129       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
3130              ordered dither the image
3131
3132              The channel or channels specified in  the  channeltype  argument
3133              are  reduced  to  binary,  using  an  ordered dither method. The
3134              choices for channeltype are All, Intensity,  Red,  Green,  Blue,
3135              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3136
3137              When channeltype is "All", the color samples are dithered into a
3138              gray level and then that gray level is stored in the three color
3139              channels.   Separately,  the  opacity channel is dithered into a
3140              bilevel opacity value which is stored in the opacity channel.
3141
3142              When channeltype is "Intensity",  only  the  color  samples  are
3143              dithered.  When  channeltype  is  "opacity" or "matte", only the
3144              opacity channel is dithered. When a color channel is  specified,
3145              only that channel is dithered.
3146
3147              The choices for N are 2 through 7. The image is divided into NxN
3148              pixel tiles.  In each tile, some or all  pixels  are  turned  to
3149              white depending on their intensity.  For each N, (N**2)+1 levels
3150              of gray can be represented.  For N == 2, 3, or 4, the pixels are
3151              turned to white in an order that maximizes dispersion (i.e., re‐
3152              duces granularity), while for N == 5, 6, and 7, they are  turned
3153              to  white in an order that creates a roughly circular black blob
3154              in the middle of each tile.  An attractive  "half-tone"  looking
3155              image  can  be  obtained by first rotating the image 45 degrees,
3156              performing a 5x5 ordered-dither operation, then rotating it back
3157              to  the  original orientation and cropping to the original image
3158              dimensions.  If the original image is gamma-encoded, it  is  ad‐
3159              viseable to convert it to linear intensity first, e.g., with the
3160              "-gamma 0.45455" option.
3161
3162       -output-directory <directory>
3163              output files to directory
3164
3165              Use -output-directory to specify  a  directory  under  which  to
3166              write  the  output  files. Normally mogrify overwrites the input
3167              files, but with this option the output files may be written to a
3168              different  directory tree so that the input files are preserved.
3169              The algorithm used preserves all of the input path specification
3170              in  the  output  path so that the user-specified input path (in‐
3171              cluding any sub-directory part) is appended to the output  path.
3172              If  the input file lacks an extension, then a suitable extension
3173              is automatically added to the output file.  The user is  respon‐
3174              sible  for  creating  the output directory specified as an argu‐
3175              ment, but subdirectories will be created as needed if the  -cre‐
3176              ate-directories  option is supplied.  This option may be used to
3177              apply transformations on files from one directory and write  the
3178              transformed files to a different directory.  In conjunction with
3179              -create-directories, this option is designed to  support  trans‐
3180              forming  whole  directory trees of files provided that the rela‐
3181              tive path of the input file is included  as  part  the  list  of
3182              filenames.
3183
3184       -orient <orientation>
3185              Set the image orientation attribute
3186
3187              Sets the image orientation attribute.  The image orientation at‐
3188              tribute is compatible with the TIFF  orientation  tag  (and  the
3189              EXIF  orientation tag).  Accepted values are undefined, TopLeft,
3190              TopRight, BottomRight, BottomLeft, LeftTop, RightTop,  RightBot‐
3191              tom, LeftBottom, and hyphenated versions thereof (e.g. left-bot‐
3192              tom).  Please note that GraphicsMagick does not include an  EXIF
3193              editor so if an EXIF profile is written to the output image, the
3194              value in the EXIF profile might not match the image.  It is pos‐
3195              sible  for  an image file to indicate its orientation in several
3196              different ways simultaneously.
3197
3198       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
3199              size and location of an image canvas
3200
3201              Use this option to specify the dimensions of the PostScript page
3202              in  dots  per  inch  or a TEXT page in pixels. The choices for a
3203              PostScript page are:
3204
3205                   11x17         792  1224
3206                   Ledger       1224   792
3207                   Legal         612  1008
3208                   Letter        612   792
3209                   LetterSmall   612   792
3210                   ArchE        2592  3456
3211                   ArchD        1728  2592
3212                   ArchC        1296  1728
3213                   ArchB         864  1296
3214                   ArchA         648   864
3215                   A0           2380  3368
3216                   A1           1684  2380
3217                   A2           1190  1684
3218                   A3            842  1190
3219                   A4            595   842
3220                   A4Small       595   842
3221                   A5            421   595
3222                   A6            297   421
3223                   A7            210   297
3224                   A8            148   210
3225                   A9            105   148
3226                   A10            74   105
3227                   B0           2836  4008
3228                   B1           2004  2836
3229                   B2           1418  2004
3230                   B3           1002  1418
3231                   B4            709  1002
3232                   B5            501   709
3233                   C0           2600  3677
3234                   C1           1837  2600
3235                   C2           1298  1837
3236                   C3            918  1298
3237                   C4            649   918
3238                   C5            459   649
3239                   C6            323   459
3240                   Flsa          612   936
3241                   Flse          612   936
3242                   HalfLetter    396   612
3243
3244              For convenience you can specify the page size by media (e.g. A4,
3245              Ledger,  etc.).  Otherwise,  -page  behaves  much like -geometry
3246              (e.g.  -page letter+43+43>).
3247
3248              This option is also used to place subimages when  writing  to  a
3249              multi-image format that supports offsets, such as GIF89 and MNG.
3250              When used for this purpose the offsets are always  measured from
3251              the  top  left  corner of the canvas and are not affected by the
3252              -gravity  option.   To  position  a  GIF  or  MNG   image,   use
3253              -page{+-}<x>{+-}<y>  (e.g.  -page  +100+200).  When writing to a
3254              MNG file, a -page option appearing ahead of the first  image  in
3255              the sequence with nonzero width and height defines the width and
3256              height values that are written in the  MHDR  chunk.   Otherwise,
3257              the MNG width and height are computed from the bounding box that
3258              contains all images in the sequence.  When writing a GIF89 file,
3259              only  the  bounding  box  method is used to determine its dimen‐
3260              sions.
3261
3262              For a PostScript page, the image is sized as  in  -geometry  and
3263              positioned relative to the lower left hand corner of the page by
3264              {+-}<xoffset>{+-}<y offset>. Use -page 612x792>, for example, to
3265              center  the image within the page. If the image size exceeds the
3266              PostScript page, it is reduced to fit  the  page.   The  default
3267              gravity  for the -page option is NorthWest, i.e., positive x and
3268              y offset are measured rightward and downward from the  top  left
3269              corner of the page, unless the -gravity option is present with a
3270              value other than NorthWest.
3271
3272              The default page dimensions for a TEXT image is 612x792.
3273
3274              This option is used in concert with -density.
3275
3276              Use +page to remove the page settings for an image.
3277
3278       -paint <radius>
3279              simulate an oil painting
3280
3281              Each pixel is replaced by the most frequent color in a  circular
3282              neighborhood whose width is specified with radius.
3283
3284       -pause <seconds>
3285              pause between animation loops [animate]
3286
3287              Pause  for  the specified number of seconds before repeating the
3288              animation.
3289
3290       -pause <seconds>
3291              pause between snapshots [import]
3292
3293              Pause for the specified number of seconds before taking the next
3294              snapshot.
3295
3296       -pen <color>
3297              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
3298
3299       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
3300
3301              Use  this option to disable reading the image pixels so that im‐
3302              age characteristics such as the image dimensions may be obtained
3303              very quickly. For identify, use +ping to force reading the image
3304              pixels so that the pixel read rate may be included in  the  dis‐
3305              played information.
3306
3307       -pointsize <value>
3308              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
3309
3310       -preview <type>
3311              image preview type
3312
3313              Use  this  option  to  affect  the preview operation of an image
3314              (e.g.   convert  file.png  -preview  Gamma   Preview:gamma.png).
3315              Choose from these previews:
3316
3317                   Rotate
3318                   Shear
3319                   Roll
3320                   Hue
3321                   Saturation
3322                   Brightness
3323                   Gamma
3324                   Spiff
3325                   Dull
3326                   Grayscale
3327                   Quantize
3328                   Despeckle
3329                   ReduceNoise
3330                   AddNoise
3331                   Sharpen
3332                   Blur
3333                   Threshold
3334                   EdgeDetect
3335                   Spread
3336                   Shade
3337                   Raise
3338                   Segment
3339                   Solarize
3340                   Swirl
3341                   Implode
3342                   Wave
3343                   OilPaint
3344                   CharcoalDrawing
3345                   JPEG
3346
3347              The default preview is JPEG.
3348
3349       -process <command>
3350              process a sequence of images using a process module
3351
3352              The command argument has the form module=arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN
3353              where module is the name of the module  to  invoke  (e.g.  "Ana‐
3354              lyze")  and  arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN  are an arbitrary number of
3355              arguments to pass to the process module.  The sequence of images
3356              is terminated by the appearance of any option.
3357
3358              If  the  -process  option appears after all of the input images,
3359              all images are processed.
3360
3361              For example:
3362
3363                   gm convert logo: -process Analyze= \
3364                     -format "%[BrightnessMean],%[BrightnessStddev]" info:-
3365                   51952,23294
3366
3367
3368       -profile <filename>
3369              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
3370
3371              -profile filename adds an ICM (ICC color management), IPTC
3372              (newswire information), or a generic (including Exif) profile to the image
3373
3374              Use +profile icm, +profile iptc, or
3375              +profile profile_name to remove the respective profile.
3376              Multiple profiles may be listed, separated by commas. Profiles may be
3377              excluded from subsequent listed matches by preceding their name with
3378              an exclamation point.  For example, +profile '!icm,*' strips
3379              all profiles except for the ICM profile.  Use identify
3380              -verbose to find out what profiles are in the image file.  Use
3381              +profile "*" to remove all profiles.
3382              Writing the image to a format that does not support profiles will
3383              of course also cause all profiles to be removed.  The JPEG and PNG
3384              formats will store any profiles that have been read and not removed.
3385              In JPEG they are stored in APP1 markers, and in PNG they are stored
3386              as hex-coded binary in compressed zTXt chunks, except for the iCC
3387              chunk which is stored in the iCCP chunk.
3388
3389              To extract a profile, the -profile option is not used.  Instead,
3390              simply write the file to an image
3391              format such as APP1, 8BIM, ICM, or IPTC.
3392
3393              For example, to extract the Exif data (which is stored in JPEG files
3394              in the APP1 profile), use
3395
3396
3397                  gm convert cockatoo.jpg exifdata.app1
3398              Note that GraphicsMagick does not attempt to update any  profile
3399              to  reflect  changes made to the image, e.g., rotation from por‐
3400              trait to landscape orientation, so it is possible that the  pre‐
3401              served profile may contain invalid data.
3402
3403       -preserve-timestamp
3404              preserve the original timestamps of the file
3405
3406              Use this option to preserve the original modification and access
3407              timestamps of the file, even if it has been modified.
3408
3409       +progress
3410              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
3411
3412              By default, when an image is displayed, a progress  monitor  bar
3413              is  shown  in  the  top left corner of an existing image display
3414              window, and the current cursor is  replaced  with  an  hourglass
3415              cursor.  Use  +progress to disable the progress monitor and busy
3416              cursor during display operations.  While the progress monitor is
3417              disabled for all operations, the busy cursor continues to be en‐
3418              abled for non-display operations such as image processing.  This
3419              option is useful for non-interactive display operations, or when
3420              a "clean" look is desired.
3421
3422       -quality <value>
3423              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
3424               For the JPEG and MPEG image formats, quality is 0 (lowest image
3425              quality  and highest compression) to 100 (best quality but least
3426              effective compression). The default  quality  is  75.   Use  the
3427              -sampling-factor  option to specify the factors for chroma down‐
3428              sampling.  To use the same quality value as that  found  by  the
3429              JPEG decoder, use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3430
3431              For  the  MIFF image format, and the TIFF format while using ZIP
3432              compression, quality/10 is the zlib compression level, which  is
3433              0  (worst  but  fastest compression) to 9 (best but slowest). It
3434              has no effect on the image appearance, since the compression  is
3435              always lossless.
3436
3437              For  the  JPEG-2000 image format, quality is mapped using a non-
3438              linear equation to the compression ratio required by the  Jasper
3439              library. This non-linear equation is intended to loosely approx‐
3440              imate the quality provided by the JPEG v1  format.  The  default
3441              quality  value 75 results in a request for 16:1 compression. The
3442              quality value 100 results in a request  for  non-lossy  compres‐
3443              sion.
3444
3445              For  the  MNG  and PNG image formats, the quality value sets the
3446              zlib compression level (quality / 10) and filter-type (quality %
3447              10).  Compression  levels  range from 0 (fastest compression) to
3448              100 (best but slowest). For compression level  0,  the  Huffman-
3449              only  strategy is used, which is fastest but not necessarily the
3450              worst compression.
3451
3452              If filter-type is 4 or less, the specified filter-type  is  used
3453              for all scanlines:
3454
3455                   0: none
3456                   1: sub
3457                   2: up
3458                   3: average
3459                   4: Paeth
3460
3461              If  filter-type is 5, adaptive filtering is used when quality is
3462              greater than 50 and the image does not have a color map,  other‐
3463              wise no filtering is used.
3464
3465              If  filter-type is 6, adaptive filtering with minimum-sum-of-ab‐
3466              solute-values is used.
3467
3468              Only if the output is MNG, if filter-type is 7, the  LOCO  color
3469              transformation  and adaptive filtering with minimum-sum-of-abso‐
3470              lute-values are used.
3471
3472              The default is quality is 75, which means nearly the  best  com‐
3473              pression  with  adaptive  filtering.  The quality setting has no
3474              effect on the appearance of PNG and MNG images, since  the  com‐
3475              pression is always lossless.
3476
3477              For further information, see the PNG specification.
3478
3479              When  writing  a JNG image with transparency, two quality values
3480              are required, one for the main image and one for  the  grayscale
3481              image  that conveys the opacity channel.  These are written as a
3482              single integer equal to the main image quality plus  1000  times
3483              the opacity quality.  For example, if you want to use quality 75
3484              for the main image and quality 90 to compress the opacity  data,
3485              use -quality 90075.
3486
3487              For  the  PNM  family  of  formats (PNM, PGM, and PPM) specify a
3488              quality factor of zero in order to obtain the ASCII  variant  of
3489              the  format. Note that -compress none used to be used to trigger
3490              ASCII output but provided the opposite result of  what  was  ex‐
3491              pected as compared with other formats.
3492
3493              For  the  TIFF format, the JPEG, WebP, Zip, and Zstd compression
3494              algorithms are influenced by the quality value.  JPEG  and  WebP
3495              provide  lossy  compression  so higher quality produces a larger
3496              file with less degradation.  The Zip and Zstd compression  algo‐
3497              rithms  (and  WebP  in lossless mode) are lossless and for these
3498              algorithms a higher ´quality' means to work harder to produce  a
3499              smaller file, but with no difference in image quality.
3500
3501       -raise <width>x<height>
3502              lighten or darken image edges
3503
3504              This will create a 3-D effect. See -geometry for details details
3505              about the geometry specification. Offsets are not used.
3506
3507              Use -raise to create a raised effect, otherwise use +raise.
3508
3509       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
3510              random threshold the image
3511
3512              The channel or channels specified in the <channeltype>  argument
3513              are  reduced  to  binary,  using an random-threshold method. The
3514              choices for channeltype are All, Intensity,  Red,  Green,  Blue,
3515              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3516
3517              When  channeltype  is  "All",  the color samples are thresholded
3518              into a graylevel and then that gray level is stored in the three
3519              color  channels.  Separately, the opacity channel is thresholded
3520              into a bilevel opacity value which  is  stored  in  the  opacity
3521              channel.  For  each pixel, a new random number is used to estab‐
3522              lish the threshold to be used. The threshold never  exceeds  the
3523              specified  maximum  (HIGH)  and is never less than the specified
3524              minimum (LOW).
3525
3526              When channeltype is "intensity",  only  the  color  samples  are
3527              thresholded.  When channeltype is "opacity" or "matte", only the
3528              opacity channel is thresholded. The other  named  channels  only
3529              threshold the associated channel.
3530
3531       -recolor <matrix>
3532              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
3533
3534              A  user  supplied  color translation matrix (expressed as a text
3535              string) is used to translate/blend the image channels  based  on
3536              weightings  in  a supplied matrix which may be of order 3 (color
3537              channels only), 4 (color channels plus  opacity),  or  5  (color
3538              channels plus opacity and offset).  Values in the columns of the
3539              matrix (red, green, blue, opacity) are used as multipliers  with
3540              the  existing channel values and added together according to the
3541              rows of the matrix.  Matrix values are floating point and may be
3542              negative.   The  offset column (column 5) is purely additive and
3543              is scaled such that 0.0 to 1.0 represents  the  maximum  quantum
3544              range  (but  values are not limited to this range). The math for
3545              the color translation matrix is similar to that  used  by  Adobe
3546              Flash except that the offset is scaled to 1.0 (divide Flash off‐
3547              set by 255 for use with GraphicsMagick) so that the results  are
3548              independent of quantum depth.
3549
3550              An identity matrix exists for each matrix order which results in
3551              no change to the image.  The translation matrix should be  based
3552              on an alteration of the identity matrix.
3553
3554              Identity matrix of order 3
3555
3556                1 0 0
3557                0 1 0
3558                0 0 1
3559
3560              which may be formatted into a convenient matrix argument similar
3561              to (comma is treated as white space):
3562
3563                -recolor "1 0 0, 0 1 0, 0 0 1"
3564
3565              Identity matrix of order 4
3566
3567                1 0 0 0
3568                0 1 0 0
3569                0 0 1 0
3570                0 0 0 1
3571
3572              Identity matrix of order 5.  The last row is required  to  exist
3573              for the purpose of parsing, but is otherwise not used.
3574
3575                1 0 0 0 0
3576                0 1 0 0 0
3577                0 0 1 0 0
3578                0 0 0 1 0
3579                0 0 0 0 1
3580
3581              As an example, an image wrongly in BGR channel order may be con‐
3582              verted to RGB using this matrix (blue->red, red->blue):
3583
3584                0 0 1
3585                0 1 0
3586                1 0 0
3587
3588              and an RGB image using standard Rec.709 primaries  may  be  con‐
3589              verted to grayscale using this matrix of standard weighting fac‐
3590              tors:
3591
3592                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3593                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3594                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3595
3596              and contrast may be reduced by scaling down by 80% and adding  a
3597              10% offset:
3598
3599                0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1
3600                0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.1
3601                0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.1
3602                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.1
3603                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
3604
3605       -red-primary <x>,<y>
3606              red chromaticity primary point
3607
3608       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3609              apply options to a portion of the image
3610
3611              The x and y offsets are treated in the same manner as in -crop.
3612
3613       -remote
3614              perform a X11 remote operation
3615
3616              The -remote command sends a command to a "gm display" or "gm an‐
3617              imate" which is already running. The only command recognized  at
3618              this  time is the name of an image file to load. This capability
3619              is very useful to load new images  without  needing  to  restart
3620              GraphicsMagick  (e.g.  for a slide-show or to use GraphicsMagick
3621              as the display  engine  for  a  different  GUI).  Also  see  the
3622              +progress  option for a way to disable progress indication for a
3623              clean look while loading new images.
3624
3625       -render
3626              render vector operations
3627
3628              Use +render to turn off rendering  vector  operations.  This  is
3629              useful  when  saving the result to vector formats such as MVG or
3630              SVG.
3631
3632       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
3633              Adjust image page offsets
3634
3635              Adjust the current image page canvas and  position  based  on  a
3636              relative  page specification.  This option may be used to change
3637              the location of a subframe (e.g. part of an animation) prior  to
3638              composition.   If  the  geometry  specification is absolute (in‐
3639              cludes a '!'), then the offset adjustment is absolute and  there
3640              is  no  adjustment  to page width and height, otherwise the page
3641              width and height values are also adjusted based on  the  current
3642              image  dimensions.  Use +repage to set the image page offsets to
3643              default.
3644
3645       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
3646              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
3647
3648              Resize the image so that its rendered size remains the  same  as
3649              the original at the specified target resolution. Either the cur‐
3650              rent image resolution units or the previously  set  with  -units
3651              are  used  to  interpret the argument. For example, if a 300 DPI
3652              image renders at 3 inches by 2 inches on a 300 DPI device,  when
3653              the  image  has  been  resampled  to 72 DPI, it will render at 3
3654              inches by 2 inches on a 72 DPI device.  Note that only  a  small
3655              number  of  image formats (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and TIFF) are capable
3656              of storing the image resolution. For formats which do  not  sup‐
3657              port  an  image resolution, the original resolution of the image
3658              must be specified via -density on  the  command  line  prior  to
3659              specifying the resample resolution.
3660
3661              Note  that  Photoshop stores and obtains image resolution from a
3662              proprietary embedded profile. If this profile exists in the  im‐
3663              age,  then  Photoshop will continue to treat the image using its
3664              former resolution, ignoring the image  resolution  specified  in
3665              the standard file header.
3666
3667              Some  image  formats (e.g. PNG) require use of metric or english
3668              units so even if the original image used a particular unit  sys‐
3669              tem,  if  it is saved to a different format prior to resampling,
3670              then it may be necessary to specify the desired resolution units
3671              using  -units  since  the  original units may have been lost. In
3672              other words, do not assume that the  resolution  units  are  re‐
3673              stored if the image has been saved to a file.
3674
3675       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3676              resize an image
3677
3678              This  is an alias for the -geometry option and it behaves in the
3679              same manner. If the -filter option precedes the -resize  option,
3680              the specified filter is used.
3681
3682              There are some exceptions:
3683
3684              When  used  as a composite option, -resize conveys the preferred
3685              size of the output image, while -geometry conveys the  size  and
3686              placement of the composite image within the main image.
3687
3688              When  used  as  a  montage option, -resize conveys the preferred
3689              size of the montage, while -geometry conveys  information  about
3690              the tiles.
3691
3692       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3693              roll an image vertically or horizontally
3694
3695              See -geometry for details the geometry specification.  The x and
3696              y offsets are not affected by the -gravity option.
3697
3698              A negative x offset rolls the image left-to-right. A negative  y
3699              offset rolls the image top-to-bottom.
3700
3701       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
3702              rotate the image
3703
3704              Positive  angles rotate the image in a clockwise direction while
3705              negative angles rotate counter-clockwise.
3706
3707              Use > to rotate the image only if its width exceeds the  height.
3708              <  rotates  the image only if its width is less than the height.
3709              For example, if you specify -rotate "-90>" and the image size is
3710              480x640,  the  image  is  not rotated.  However, if the image is
3711              640x480, it is rotated by -90 degrees.  If you use > or  <,  en‐
3712              close  it  in quotation marks to prevent it from being misinter‐
3713              preted as a file redirection.
3714
3715              Empty triangles left over from rotating  the  image  are  filled
3716              with  the  color  defined as background (class backgroundColor).
3717              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3718              -fill option.
3719
3720       -sample <geometry>
3721              scale image using pixel sampling
3722
3723              See  -geometry  for  details  about  the geometry specification.
3724              -sample ignores the -filter selection if the -filter  option  is
3725              present.   Offsets,  if  present in the geometry string, are ig‐
3726              nored, and the -gravity option has no effect.
3727
3728       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
3729              chroma subsampling factors
3730
3731              This option specifies the sampling factors to  be  used  by  the
3732              DPX,  JPEG,  MPEG,  or YUV encoders for chroma downsampling. The
3733              sampling factor must be specified while reading the raw YUV for‐
3734              mat  since  it  is  not preserved in the file header.  Industry-
3735              standard video subsampling notation such as "4:2:2" may also  be
3736              used to specify the sampling factors. "4:2:2" is equivalent to a
3737              specification of "2x1"
3738
3739              The JPEG decoder obtains  the  original  sampling  factors  (and
3740              quality settings) when a JPEG file is read. To re-use the origi‐
3741              nal sampling factors (and quality setting) when JPEG is  output,
3742              use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3743
3744       -scale <geometry>
3745              scale the image.
3746
3747              See  -geometry  for  details  about  the geometry specification.
3748              -scale uses a simpler, faster  algorithm,  and  it  ignores  the
3749              -filter selection if the -filter option is present.  Offsets, if
3750              present in the geometry string, are ignored,  and  the  -gravity
3751              option has no effect.
3752
3753       -scene <value>
3754              set scene number
3755
3756              This option sets the scene number of an image or the first image
3757              in an image sequence.
3758
3759       -scenes <value-value>
3760              range of image scene numbers to read
3761
3762              Each image in the range is read with the filename followed by  a
3763              period  (.)  and  the decimal scene number.  You can change this
3764              behavior by embedding a %d, %0Nd, %o, %0No, %x, or  %0Nx  printf
3765              format specification in the file name. For example,
3766
3767                  gm montage -scenes 5-7 image.miff montage.miff
3768
3769              makes  a  montage  of  files image.miff.5, image.miff.6, and im‐
3770              age.miff.7, and
3771
3772                  gm animate -scenes 0-12 image%02d.miff
3773
3774              animates files image00.miff, image01.miff, through image12.miff.
3775
3776       -screen
3777              specify the screen to capture
3778
3779              This option indicates that the GetImage request used  to  obtain
3780              the  image  should  be  done on the root window, rather than di‐
3781              rectly on the specified window.  In this  way,  you  can  obtain
3782              pieces  of  other windows that overlap the specified window, and
3783              more importantly, you can capture menus or other popups that are
3784              independent windows but appear over the specified window.
3785
3786       -set <attribute> <value>
3787              set an image attribute
3788
3789              Set  a  named image attribute.  The attribute is set on the cur‐
3790              rent (previously specified on command line) image.
3791
3792       +set <attribute>
3793              unset an image attribute
3794
3795              Unset a named image attribute.  The attribute  is  removed  from
3796              the current (previously specified on command line) image.
3797
3798       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
3799              segment an image
3800
3801              Segment an image by analyzing the histograms of the color compo‐
3802              nents and identifying units that are homogeneous with the  fuzzy
3803              c-means technique.
3804
3805              Segmentation  is  a  very  useful fast and and approximate color
3806              quantization algorithm for scanned printed pages or scanned car‐
3807              toons.  It may also be used as a special effect. Specify cluster
3808              threshold as the minimum percentage of total pixels in a cluster
3809              before it is considered valid.  For huge images containing small
3810              detail, this may need to be a tiny fraction of a  percent  (e.g.
3811              0.015)  so that important detail is not lost.  Smoothing thresh‐
3812              old eliminates noise in the second derivative of the  histogram.
3813              As  the value is increased, you can expect a smoother second de‐
3814              rivative. The default is 1.5. Add the -verbose option to  see  a
3815              dump  of  cluster statistics given the parameters used. The sta‐
3816              tistics may be used as a guide to help fine tune the options.
3817
3818       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
3819              shade the image using a distant light source
3820
3821              Specify azimuth and elevation  as  the  position  of  the  light
3822              source.  Use +shade to return the shading results as a grayscale
3823              image.
3824
3825       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
3826              shadow the montage
3827
3828       -shared-memory
3829              use shared memory
3830
3831              This option specifies whether the utility should attempt to  use
3832              shared memory for pixmaps.  GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
3833              shared memory support, and the display must support the  MIT-SHM
3834              extension.   Otherwise,  this option is ignored.  The default is
3835              True.
3836
3837       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
3838              sharpen the image
3839
3840              Use a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard  devia‐
3841              tion (sigma).
3842
3843       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
3844              shave pixels from the image edges
3845
3846              Specify the width of the region to be removed from both sides of
3847              the image and the height of the regions to be removed  from  top
3848              and bottom.
3849
3850       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
3851              shear the image along the X or Y axis
3852
3853              Use the specified positive or negative shear angle.
3854
3855              Shearing slides one edge of an image along the X or Y axis, cre‐
3856              ating a parallelogram. An X direction shear slides an edge along
3857              the X axis, while a Y direction shear slides an edge along the Y
3858              axis. The amount of the shear is controlled by  a  shear  angle.
3859              For  X direction shears, x degrees is measured relative to the Y
3860              axis, and similarly, for Y direction shears y  degrees  is  mea‐
3861              sured relative to the X axis.
3862
3863              Empty  triangles  left  over  from shearing the image are filled
3864              with the color defined as  background  (class  backgroundColor).
3865              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3866              -fill option.
3867
3868       -silent
3869              operate silently
3870
3871       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
3872              width and height of the image
3873
3874              Use this option to specify the width and height  of  raw  images
3875              whose  dimensions are unknown such as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK. In ad‐
3876              dition to width and height, use -size with an offset to skip any
3877              header  information in the image or tell the number of colors in
3878              a MAP image file, (e.g. -size 640x512+256).
3879
3880              For Photo CD images, choose from these sizes:
3881
3882                   192x128
3883                   384x256
3884                   768x512
3885                   1536x1024
3886                   3072x2048
3887
3888              Finally, use this option to choose a particular resolution layer
3889              of a JBIG or JPEG image (e.g. -size 1024x768).
3890
3891       -snaps <value>
3892              number of screen snapshots
3893
3894              Use  this  option  to grab more than one image from the X server
3895              screen, to create an animation sequence.
3896
3897       -solarize <factor>
3898              negate all pixels above the threshold level
3899
3900              Specify factor as the percent threshold of the  intensity  (0  -
3901              99.9%).
3902
3903              This  option produces a solarization effect seen when exposing a
3904              photographic film to light during the development process.
3905
3906       -spread <amount>
3907              displace image pixels by a random amount
3908
3909              Amount defines the size of the neighborhood around each pixel to
3910              choose a candidate pixel to swap.
3911
3912       -stegano <offset>
3913              hide watermark within an image
3914
3915              Use  an  offset  to start the image hiding some number of pixels
3916              from the beginning of the image.  Note this offset and the image
3917              size.   You  will  need this information to recover the stegano‐
3918              graphic image (e.g. display -size 320x256+35 stegano:image.png).
3919
3920       -stereo
3921              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
3922
3923              The left side of the stereo pair is saved as the red channel  of
3924              the output image.  The right side is saved as the green channel.
3925              Red-green stereo glasses  are  required  to  properly  view  the
3926              stereo image.
3927
3928       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
3929
3930              All  embedded profiles and text attributes are stripped from the
3931              image.  This is useful for images used for the web, or when out‐
3932              put files need to be as small as possible
3933
3934              Be  careful  not to use this option to remove author, copyright,
3935              and license information that you are required to retain when re‐
3936              distributing an image.
3937
3938       -stroke <color>
3939              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
3940
3941              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3942              -fill option.
3943
3944              See -draw for further details.
3945
3946       -strokewidth <value>
3947              set the stroke width
3948
3949              See -draw for further details.
3950
3951       -swirl <degrees>
3952              swirl image pixels about the center
3953
3954              Degrees defines the tightness of the swirl.
3955
3956       -text-font <name>
3957              font for writing fixed-width text
3958
3959              Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed  (type‐
3960              writer style) formatted text.  The default is 14 point Courier.
3961
3962              You  can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
3963              Type, or X11 font.  For example, Courier.ttf is a TrueType  font
3964              and x:fixed is X11.
3965
3966       -texture <filename>
3967              name of texture to tile onto the image background
3968
3969       -threshold <value>{%}
3970              threshold the image
3971
3972              Modify  the  image  such that any pixel sample with an intensity
3973              value greater than the threshold is assigned the maximum  inten‐
3974              sity  (white),  or  otherwise  is assigned the minimum intensity
3975              (black). If a percent prefix is applied, then the threshold is a
3976              percentage of the available range.
3977
3978              To  efficiently  create a black and white image from a color im‐
3979              age, use
3980
3981                  gm convert -threshold 50% in.png out.png
3982
3983              The optimum threshold value depends on the nature of the  image.
3984              In  order  to  threshold  individual channels, use the -operator
3985              subcommand with it's Threshold, Threshold-White,  or  Threshold-
3986              Black options.
3987
3988       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3989              resize an image (quickly)
3990
3991              The -thumbnail command resizes the image as quickly as possible,
3992              with more concern for speed than resulting image  quality.   Re‐
3993              gardless,  resulting image quality should be acceptable for many
3994              uses.  It is primarily intended to be used to  generate  smaller
3995              versions  of  the image, but may also be used to enlarge the im‐
3996              age.  The -thumbnail geometry argument observes the same  syntax
3997              and rules as it does for -resize.
3998
3999       -tile <filename>
4000              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
4001
4002       -tile <geometry>
4003              layout of images [montage]
4004
4005       -title <string>
4006              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4007
4008              Use this option to assign a specific title to the image. This is
4009              assigned to the image window and is typically displayed  in  the
4010              window  title  bar.   Optionally you can include the image file‐
4011              name, type, width, height, Exif data, or other  image  attribute
4012              by embedding special format characters described under the -for‐
4013              mat option.
4014
4015              For example,
4016
4017                   -title "%m:%f %wx%h"
4018
4019              produces an image title of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for  an  image
4020              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
4021
4022       -transform
4023              transform the image
4024
4025              This  option  applies  the transformation matrix from a previous
4026              -affine option.
4027
4028                  gm convert -affine 2,2,-2,2,0,0 -transform bird.ppm bird.jpg
4029
4030       -transparent <color>
4031              make this color transparent within the image
4032
4033              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
4034              -fill option.
4035
4036       -treedepth <value>
4037              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4038
4039              Normally,  this integer value is zero or one. A value of zero or
4040              one causes the use of an optimal tree depth for the color reduc‐
4041              tion algorithm
4042
4043              An optimal depth generally allows the best representation of the
4044              source image with the fastest computational speed and the  least
4045              amount  of  memory.  However, the default depth is inappropriate
4046              for some images. To assure the best representation,  try  values
4047              between  2 and 8 for this parameter.  Refer to quantize for more
4048              details.
4049
4050              The -colors or -monochrome option, or writing to an image format
4051              which  requires  color reduction, is required for this option to
4052              take effect.
4053
4054       -trim  trim an image
4055
4056              This option removes any edges that are exactly the same color as
4057              the  corner  pixels.   Use -fuzz to make -trim remove edges that
4058              are nearly the same color as the corner pixels.
4059
4060       -type <type>
4061              the image type
4062
4063              Choose from: Bilevel, Grayscale,  Palette,  PaletteMatte,  True‐
4064              Color, TrueColorMatte, ColorSeparation, ColorSeparationMatte, or
4065              Optimize.
4066
4067              Normally, when a format supports different  subformats  such  as
4068              bilevel, grayscale, palette, truecolor, and truecolor+alpha, the
4069              encoder will try to choose a suitable subformat based on the na‐
4070              ture  of  the  image. The -type option may be used to tailor the
4071              output subformat. By default the output subformat  is  based  on
4072              readily  available  image  information and is usually similar to
4073              the input format.
4074
4075              Specify -type Optimize in order to enable inspecting all  pixels
4076              (if  necessary)  in  order to find the most efficient subformat.
4077              Inspecting all of the pixels may be slow for very large  images,
4078              particularly if they are stored in a disk cache. If an RGB image
4079              contains only gray pixels, then every pixel in the image must be
4080              inspected  in  order  to  decide  that  the  image  is  actually
4081              grayscale!
4082
4083              Sometimes a specific subformat is desired. For example, to force
4084              a  JPEG  image to be written in TrueColor RGB format even though
4085              only gray pixels are present, use
4086
4087                  gm convert bird.pgm -type TrueColor bird.jpg
4088
4089              Similarly, using -type TrueColorMatte will force the encoder  to
4090              write  an  alpha channel even though the image is opaque, if the
4091              output format supports transparency.
4092
4093              Some pseudo-formats (e.g. the XC format) will  respect  the  re‐
4094              quested  type  if it occurs previously on the command line.  For
4095              example, to obtain a DirectClass solid color canvas image rather
4096              than PsuedoClass, use
4097
4098                  gm convert -size 640x480 -type TrueColor xc:red red.miff
4099
4100              Likewise,  specify -type Bilevel, Grayscale, TrueColor, or True‐
4101              ColorMatte prior to reading a Postscript (or PDF file) in  order
4102              to  influence the type of image that Ghostcript returns. Reading
4103              performance will be dramatically improved for black/white  Post‐
4104              script  if Bilevel is specified, and will be considerably faster
4105              if Grayscale is specified.
4106
4107       -update <seconds>
4108               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
4109
4110              Suppose that while you are displaying an image the file that  is
4111              currently displayed is over-written.  display will automatically
4112              detect that the input file has been changed and update the  dis‐
4113              played image accordingly.
4114
4115       -units <type>
4116              the units of image resolution
4117
4118              Choose  from:  Undefined, PixelsPerInch, or PixelsPerCentimeter.
4119              This option is normally used in conjunction  with  the  -density
4120              option.
4121
4122       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
4123              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
4124
4125              The  -unsharp  option  sharpens an image. The image is convolved
4126              with a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
4127              tion  (sigma).  For  reasonable results, radius should be larger
4128              than sigma. Use a radius of 0 to have the method select a  suit‐
4129              able radius.
4130
4131              The parameters are:
4132
4133
4134               radius
4135
4136
4137                    The  radius  of  the Gaussian, in pixels, not counting the
4138                    center pixel (default 0).
4139
4140               sigma
4141
4142
4143                    The standard deviation of the Gaussian, in pixels (default
4144                    1.0).
4145
4146               amount
4147
4148
4149                    The  percentage of the difference between the original and
4150                    the blur image that is added back into the  original  (de‐
4151                    fault 1.0).
4152
4153               threshold
4154
4155
4156                    The  threshold,  as  a fraction of MaxRGB, needed to apply
4157                    the difference amount (default 0.05).
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162       -use-pixmap
4163              use the pixmap
4164
4165       -verbose
4166              print detailed information about the image
4167
4168              This information is printed: image scene number; image name; im‐
4169              age  size; the image class (DirectClass or PseudoClass); the to‐
4170              tal number of unique colors; and the number of seconds  to  read
4171              and  transform the image. If the image is DirectClass, the total
4172              number of unique colors is  not  displayed  unless  -verbose  is
4173              specified  twice since it may take quite a long time to compute,
4174              particularly for deep images.  If the image is PseudoClass  then
4175              its  pixels are defined by indexes into a colormap. If the image
4176              is DirectClass then each pixel includes a complete and  indepen‐
4177              dent color specification.
4178
4179              If -colors is also specified, the total unique colors in the im‐
4180              age and color reduction error values are printed. Refer to quan‐
4181              tize for a description of these values.
4182
4183       -version
4184              print GraphicsMagick version string
4185
4186       -view <string>
4187              FlashPix viewing parameters
4188
4189       -virtual-pixel <method>
4190              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
4191
4192              This  option defines "virtual pixels" for use in operations that
4193              can access pixels outside the boundaries of an image.
4194
4195              Choose from these methods:
4196
4197
4198               Constant
4199
4200
4201                    Use the image background color.
4202
4203               Edge
4204
4205
4206                    Extend the edge pixel toward infinity (default).
4207
4208               Mirror
4209
4210
4211                    Mirror the image.
4212
4213               Tile
4214
4215
4216                    Tile the image.
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221               This option affects operations that use virtual pixels such  as
4222               -blur, -sharpen, -wave, etc.
4223
4224       -visual <type>
4225              animate images using this X visual type
4226
4227              Choose from these visual classes:
4228
4229                   StaticGray
4230                   GrayScale
4231                   StaticColor
4232                   PseudoColor
4233                   TrueColor
4234                   DirectColor
4235                   default
4236                   visual id
4237
4238              The  X  server  must support the visual you choose, otherwise an
4239              error occurs.  If a visual is not specified,  the  visual  class
4240              that  can  display  the  most simultaneous colors on the default
4241              screen is chosen.
4242
4243       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
4244              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
4245
4246       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
4247              alter an image along a sine wave
4248
4249              Specify amplitude and wavelength of the wave.
4250
4251       -white-point <x>,<y>
4252              chromaticity white point
4253
4254       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
4255              pixels above the threshold become white
4256
4257              Use -white-threshold to set pixels with values above the  speci‐
4258              fied  threshold  to  maximum value (white). If only one value is
4259              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
4260              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
4261              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
4262              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
4263              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
4264              a  channel  later  in  the  list. If a percent (%) symbol is ap‐
4265              pended, then the values are treated as a percentage  of  maximum
4266              range.
4267
4268       -window <id>
4269              make image the background of a window
4270
4271              id  can be a window id or name.  Specify root to select X's root
4272              window as the target window.
4273
4274              By default the image is tiled onto the background of the  target
4275              window.    If  backdrop or -geometry are specified, the image is
4276              surrounded by the background color.  Refer to  X  RESOURCES  for
4277              details.
4278
4279              The  image  will not display on the root window if the image has
4280              more unique colors than the target window colormap allows.   Use
4281              -colors to reduce the number of colors.
4282
4283       -window-group
4284              specify the window group
4285
4286       -write <filename>
4287              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
4288
4289              The  current image is written to the specified filename and then
4290              processing continues using that image. The following is an exam‐
4291              ple  of  how  several  sizes of an image may be generated in one
4292              command (repeat as often as needed):
4293
4294                  gm convert input.jpg -resize 50% -write input50.jpg \
4295                            -resize 25% input25.jpg
4296
4297       -write <filename>
4298              write the image to a file [display]
4299
4300              If filename already exists, you will be prompted as  to  whether
4301              it should be overwritten.
4302
4303              By  default, the image is written in the format that it was read
4304              in as.  To specify a particular image  format,  prefix  filename
4305              with  the image type and a colon (e.g., ps:image) or specify the
4306              image type as the filename suffix (e.g., image.ps). Specify file
4307              as  -  for standard output. If file has the extension .Z or .gz,
4308              the file size is compressed using compress or gzip respectively.
4309              Precede the image file name with | to pipe to a system command.
4310
4311              Use -compress to specify the type of image compression.
4312
4313              The  equivalent  X  resource  for  this  option is writeFilename
4314              (class WriteFilename).  See "X Resources", below, for details.
4315

ENVIRONMENT

4317       COLUMNS
4318              Output screen width. Used when formatting text for  the  screen.
4319              Many  Unix  systems  keep this shell variable up to date, but it
4320              may need to be explicitly exported in order  for  GraphicsMagick
4321              to see it.
4322
4323       DISPLAY
4324              X11  display  ID  (host,  display number, and screen in the form
4325              hostname:display.screen).
4326
4327       HOME   Location of user's home directory.  For  security  reasons,  now
4328              only observed by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do
4329              not have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.  When
4330              supported,  GraphicsMagick  searches  for configuration files in
4331              $HOME/.magick if the  directory  exists.  See  MAGICK_CODER_MOD‐
4332              ULE_PATH,  MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH,  and MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4333              if more flexibility is needed.
4334
4335       MAGICK_ACCESS_MONITOR
4336              When set to TRUE, command line monitor mode (enabled  by  -moni‐
4337              tor)  will  also show files accessed (including temporary files)
4338              and any external commands which are executed. This is useful for
4339              debugging,  but  also illustrates arguments made available to an
4340              access handler registered by the MagickSetConfirmAccessHandler()
4341              C library function.
4342
4343       MAGICK_CODER_STABILITY
4344              The  minimum  coder  stability level before it will be used. The
4345              available levels are PRIMARY, STABLE, UNSTABLE, and BROKEN.  The
4346              default  minimum  level is UNSTABLE, which means that all avail‐
4347              able working coders will be used. The purpose of this option  is
4348              to  reduce the security exposure (or apparent complexity) due to
4349              the huge number of formats  supported.  Coders  at  the  PRIMARY
4350              level are commonly used formats with very well maintained imple‐
4351              mentations. Coders at the STABLE level are reasonably well main‐
4352              tained  but  represent less used formats. Coders at the UNSTABLE
4353              level either have weak implementations, the file  format  itself
4354              is  weak, or the probability the coder will be needed is vanish‐
4355              ingly small. Coders at the BROKEN level are known to  often  not
4356              work  properly  or might not be useful in their current state at
4357              all.
4358
4359       MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH
4360              Search path to use when searching for image  format  coder  mod‐
4361              ules.  This path allows the user to arbitrarily extend the image
4362              formats supported by GraphicsMagick by adding  loadable  modules
4363              to  an  arbitrary  location  rather  than  copying them into the
4364              GraphicsMagick installation directory.  The  formatting  of  the
4365              search  path  is  similar to operating system search paths (i.e.
4366              colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited for Microsoft
4367              Windows).  This user specified search path is used before trying
4368              the default search path.
4369
4370       MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH
4371              Search path to  use  when  searching  for  configuration  (.mgk)
4372              files.   The formatting of the search path is similar to operat‐
4373              ing system search paths (i.e.  colon  delimited  for  Unix,  and
4374              semi-colon delimited for Microsoft Windows). This user specified
4375              search path is used before trying the default search path.
4376
4377       MAGICK_DEBUG
4378              Debug options (see -debug for details).  Setting  the  configure
4379              debug option via an environment variable (e.g. MAGICK_DEBUG=con‐
4380              figure) is necessary to see the complete initialization process,
4381              which includes searching for configuration files.
4382
4383       MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4384              Search  path  to  use  when searching for filter process modules
4385              (invoked via -process). This path allows the user to arbitrarily
4386              extend GraphicsMagick's image processing functionality by adding
4387              loadable modules to an arbitrary location  rather  than  copying
4388              them into the GraphicsMagick installation directory. The format‐
4389              ting of the search path is similar to  operating  system  search
4390              paths  (i.e.  colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited
4391              for Microsoft Windows). This user specified search path is  used
4392              before trying the default search path.
4393
4394       MAGICK_GHOSTSCRIPT_PATH
4395              For  Microsoft  Windows, specify the path to the Ghostscript in‐
4396              stallation rather than searching for it  via  the  Windows  reg‐
4397              istry.   This helps in case Ghostscript is not installed via the
4398              Ghostscript Windows installer or the  user  wants  more  control
4399              over the Ghostscript used.
4400
4401       MAGICK_HOME
4402              Path  to  top of GraphicsMagick installation directory. Only ob‐
4403              served by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick  which  do  not
4404              have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.
4405
4406       MAGICK_MMAP_READ
4407              If  MAGICK_MMAP_READ is set to TRUE, GraphicsMagick will attempt
4408              to memory-map the input file for reading. This usually  substan‐
4409              tially  improves repeated read performance since the file is al‐
4410              ready in memory after the first time it has been read.  However,
4411              testing shows that performance may be reduced for files accessed
4412              for the first time since data is accessed via page-faults  (upon
4413              first  access)  and many operating systems fail to do sequential
4414              read-ahead of memory mapped files,  and  particularly  if  those
4415              files  are  accessed  over a network.  If many large input files
4416              are read, then enabling this  option  may  harm  performance  by
4417              overloading the operating system's VM system as it then needs to
4418              free unmapped pages and map new ones.
4419
4420       MAGICK_IO_FSYNC
4421              If MAGICK_IO_FSYNC is set to TRUE, then GraphicsMagick will  re‐
4422              quest  that the output file is fully flushed and synchronized to
4423              disk when it is closed. This incurs a performance  penalty,  but
4424              has  the  benefit that if the power fails or the system crashes,
4425              the file should be valid on disk. If image files are  referenced
4426              from  a  database,  then this option helps assure that the files
4427              referenced by the database are valid.
4428
4429       MAGICK_IOBUF_SIZE
4430              The amount of I/O buffering (in bytes) to use when  reading  and
4431              writing  encoded  files. The default is 16384, which is observed
4432              to work well for many cases. The best value for a local filesys‐
4433              tem  is usually the the native filesystem block size (e.g. 4096,
4434              8192, or even 131,072 for ZFS) in order to minimize  the  number
4435              of  physical  disk I/O operations.  I/O performance to files ac‐
4436              cessed over a network may benefit significantly by  tuning  this
4437              option.  Larger  values  are not necessarily better (they may be
4438              slower!), and there is rarely  any  benefit  from  using  values
4439              larger  than  32768.  Use  convert's -verbose option in order to
4440              evaluate read and write rates in pixels per second while keeping
4441              in  mind  that  the  operating system will try to cache files in
4442              RAM.
4443
4444       MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK
4445              Maximum amount of disk space allowed for use by the pixel cache.
4446
4447       MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES
4448              Maximum number of open files.
4449
4450       MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP
4451              Maximum size of a  memory  mapped  file  allocation.   A  memory
4452              mapped  file consumes memory when the file is accessed, although
4453              the system may reclaim such memory when needed.
4454
4455       MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY
4456              Maximum amount of memory to allocate from the heap.
4457
4458       MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS
4459              Maximum number of total pixels (image rows times  image  colums)
4460              to allow for any image which is requested to be created or read.
4461              This is useful to place a limit on how large an  image  may  be.
4462              If  the  input  image  file has image dimensions larger than the
4463              pixel limit, then the image memory allocation is denied  and  an
4464              error  is  returned  immediately.  This is a per-image limit and
4465              does not limit the total number of pixels due to multiple  image
4466              frames/pages (e.g. multi-page document or an animation).
4467
4468       MAGICK_LIMIT_READ
4469              Maximum number of uncompressed bytes which may be read while de‐
4470              coding an image.  Each read by the software from the input  file
4471              is  counted  against the total, even if it has been read before.
4472              Decoding fails when the limit is reached.  This limit helps  de‐
4473              fend  against  highly compressed files (e.g. via gzip), or files
4474              which use complex looping structures, or when data is being read
4475              from a stream (pipe).
4476
4477       MAGICK_LIMIT_WIDTH
4478              Maximum pixel width of an image read, or created.
4479
4480       MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT
4481              Maximum pixel height of an image read, or created.
4482
4483       MAGICK_TMPDIR
4484              Path  to  directory  where GraphicsMagick should write temporary
4485              files. The default is to use the system default, or the location
4486              set by TMPDIR.
4487
4488       TMPDIR For  POSIX-compatible systems (Unix-compatible), the path to the
4489              directory where all applications should write  temporary  files.
4490              Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR if it is set.
4491
4492       TMP or TEMP
4493              For  Microsoft Windows, the path to the directory where applica‐
4494              tions should write temporary files. Overridden by  MAGICK_TMPDIR
4495              if it is set.
4496
4497       OMP_NUM_THREADS
4498              As per the OpenMP standard, this specifies the number of threads
4499              to use in parallel regions. Some compilers default the number of
4500              threads  to use to the number of processor cores available while
4501              others default to just one thread. See the OpenMP  specification
4502              for  other  standard  adjustments and your compiler's manual for
4503              vendor-specific settings.
4504

CONFIGURATION FILES

4506       GraphicsMagick uses a number of XML format configuration files:
4507
4508       colors.mgk
4509              colors configuration file
4510
4511                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4512                <colormap>
4513                  <color name="AliceBlue" red="240" green="248" blue="255"
4514                         compliance="SVG, X11, XPM" />
4515                </colormap>
4516
4517       delegates.mgk
4518              delegates configuration file
4519
4520       log.mgk
4521              logging configuration file
4522
4523                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4524                <magicklog>
4525                  <log events="None" />
4526                  <log output="stdout" />
4527                  <log filename="Magick-%d.log" />
4528                  <log generations="3" />
4529                  <log limit="2000" />
4530                  <log format="%t %r %u %p %m/%f/%l/%d:\n  %e"  />
4531                </magicklog>
4532
4533       modules.mgk
4534              loadable modules configuration file
4535
4536                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4537                <modulemap>
4538                  <module magick="8BIM" name="META" />
4539                </modulemap>
4540
4541       type.mgk
4542              master type (fonts) configuration file
4543
4544                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4545                <typemap>
4546                  <include file="type-windows.mgk" />
4547                  <type
4548                    name="AvantGarde-Book"
4549                    fullname="AvantGarde Book"
4550                    family="AvantGarde"
4551                    foundry="URW"
4552                    weight="400"
4553                    style="normal"
4554                    stretch="normal"
4555                    format="type1"
4556                    metrics="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.afm"
4557                    glyphs="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.pfb"
4558                  />
4559                </typemap>
4560

GM ANIMATE

4562       Animate displays a sequence of images on any workstation  display  run‐
4563       ning an X server. animate first determines the hardware capabilities of
4564       the workstation. If the number of unique colors in  an  image  is  less
4565       than  or  equal to the number the workstation can support, the image is
4566       displayed in an X window. Otherwise the number of colors in  the  image
4567       is  first  reduced to match the color resolution of the workstation be‐
4568       fore it is displayed.
4569
4570       This means that a continuous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel image  can  display
4571       on  a 8 bit pseudo-color device or monochrome device. In most instances
4572       the reduced color image closely resembles the original.  Alternatively,
4573       a  monochrome  or pseudo-color image sequence can display on a continu‐
4574       ous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel device.
4575
4576       To help prevent color flashing on X server visuals that have colormaps,
4577       animate  creates a single colormap from the image sequence. This can be
4578       rather time consuming. You can speed this operation up by reducing  the
4579       colors in the image before you "animate" them. Use mogrify to color re‐
4580       duce the images to a single colormap. See mogrify(1) for  details.  Al‐
4581       ternatively,  you  can use a Standard Colormap; or a static, direct, or
4582       true color visual.  You can define a Standard Colormap  with  xstdcmap.
4583       See xstdcmap(1) for details. This method is recommended for colormapped
4584       X server because it eliminates the need to compute a global colormap.
4585

EXAMPLES

4587       To animate a set of images of a cockatoo, use:
4588
4589           gm animate cockatoo.*
4590
4591       To animate a cockatoo image sequence while using the Standard  Colormap
4592       best, use:
4593
4594           xstdcmap -best
4595           gm animate -map best cockatoo.*
4596
4597       To  animate an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a back‐
4598       drop, use:
4599
4600
4601           gm animate +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.*
4602

OPTIONS

4604       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
4605
4606
4607       -authenticate <string>
4608              decrypt image with this password
4609
4610       -backdrop
4611              display the image centered on a backdrop.
4612
4613       -background <color>
4614              the background color
4615
4616       -bordercolor <color>
4617              the border color
4618
4619       -borderwidth <geometry>
4620              the border width
4621
4622       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4623              remove pixels from the interior of an image
4624
4625       -colormap <type>
4626              define the colormap type
4627
4628       -colors <value>
4629              preferred number of colors in the image
4630
4631       -colorspace <value>
4632              the type of colorspace
4633
4634       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4635              preferred size and location of the cropped image
4636
4637       -debug <events>
4638              enable debug printout
4639
4640       -define <key>{=<value>},...
4641              add coder/decoder specific options
4642
4643       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
4644              display the next image after pausing
4645
4646       -density <width>x<height>
4647              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
4648
4649       -depth <value>
4650              depth of the image
4651
4652       -display <host:display[.screen]>
4653              specifies the X server to contact
4654
4655       -dispose <method>
4656              GIF disposal method
4657
4658       -dither
4659              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
4660
4661       -font <name>
4662              use this font when annotating the image with text
4663
4664       -foreground <color>
4665              define the foreground color
4666
4667       -gamma <value>
4668              level of gamma correction
4669
4670       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
4671              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
4672
4673       -help  print usage instructions
4674
4675       -iconGeometry <geometry>
4676              specify the icon geometry
4677
4678       -iconic
4679              iconic animation
4680
4681       -interlace <type>
4682              the type of interlacing scheme
4683
4684       -limit <type> <value>
4685              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
4686              resource limit
4687
4688       -log <string>
4689              Specify format for debug log
4690
4691       -map <type>
4692              display image using this type.
4693
4694       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
4695
4696       -mattecolor <color>
4697              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
4698
4699       -monitor
4700              show progress indication
4701
4702       -monochrome
4703              transform the image to black and white
4704
4705       -name  name an image
4706
4707       -noop  NOOP (no option)
4708
4709       -pause <seconds>
4710              pause between animation loops [animate]
4711
4712       -remote
4713              perform a X11 remote operation
4714
4715       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
4716              rotate the image
4717
4718       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
4719              chroma subsampling factors
4720
4721       -scenes <value-value>
4722              range of image scene numbers to read
4723
4724       -shared-memory
4725              use shared memory
4726
4727       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
4728              width and height of the image
4729
4730       -text-font <name>
4731              font for writing fixed-width text
4732
4733       -title <string>
4734              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4735
4736       -treedepth <value>
4737              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4738
4739       -trim  trim an image
4740
4741       -type <type>
4742              the image type
4743
4744       -verbose
4745              print detailed information about the image
4746
4747       -version
4748              print GraphicsMagick version string
4749
4750       -visual <type>
4751              animate images using this X visual type
4752
4753       -window <id>
4754              make image the background of a window
4755
4756              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
4757              above.
4758
4759
4760              Any option you specify on the command line remains in effect for
4761              the  group of images following it, until the group is terminated
4762              by the appearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to  ani‐
4763              mate  three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with an
4764              unlimited number of colors, and the third with only  16  colors,
4765              use:
4766
4767
4768                  gm animate -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
4769                           -colors 16 cockatoo.3
4770
4771              Animate  options can appear on the command line or in your X re‐
4772              sources file. See X(1). Options on the  command  line  supersede
4773              values  specified in your X resources file.  Image filenames may
4774              appear in any order on the command line if the image  format  is
4775              MIFF (refer to miff(5) and the scene keyword is specified in the
4776              image. Otherwise the images will display in the order  they  ap‐
4777              pear on the command line.
4778

MOUSE BUTTONS

4780       Press  any button to map or unmap the Command widget. See the next sec‐
4781       tion for more information about the Command widget.
4782

COMMAND WIDGET

4784       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
4785
4786           Animate
4787
4788               Open
4789               Play
4790               Step
4791               Repeat
4792               Auto Reverse
4793
4794           Speed
4795
4796               Faster
4797               Slower
4798
4799           Direction
4800
4801               Forward
4802               Reverse
4803
4804           Image Info
4805           Help
4806           Quit
4807
4808
4809       Menu items with a indented triangle have a sub-menu.  They  are  repre‐
4810       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
4811       pointer to the appropriate menu and press a button and drag.  When  you
4812       find  the  desired sub-menu item, release the button and the command is
4813       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
4814       execute a particular command.
4815

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

4817               Ctl+O
4818
4819                    Press to load an image from a file.
4820               space
4821
4822                    Press to display the next image in the sequence.
4823               <
4824
4825                    Press  to  speed-up  the  display of the images.  Refer to
4826                    -delay for more information.
4827               >
4828
4829                    Press to slow the display of the images.  Refer to  -delay
4830                    for more information.
4831               ?
4832
4833                    Press  to  display information about the image.  Press any
4834                    key or button to erase the information.
4835                    This information is printed: image name;  image size;  and
4836                    the total number of unique colors in the image.
4837               F1
4838
4839                    Press to display helpful information about animate(1).
4840               Ctl-q
4841
4842                    Press to discard all images and exit program.
4843
4844

X RESOURCES

4846       Animate  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
4847       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
4848       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
4849
4850       All  animate  options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, the
4851       animate program uses the following X resources:
4852
4853               background (class Background)
4854
4855
4856                    Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image  window
4857                    background. The default is #ccc.
4858               borderColor (class BorderColor)
4859
4860
4861                    Specifies  the preferred color to use for the Image window
4862                    border. The default is #ccc.
4863               borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
4864
4865
4866                    Specifies the width in pixels of the Image window  border.
4867                    The default is 2.
4868               font (class Font or FontList)
4869
4870
4871                    Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use in normal
4872                    formatted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
4873               foreground (class Foreground)
4874
4875
4876                    Specifies the preferred color to use for text  within  the
4877                    Image window.  The default is black.
4878               geometry (class geometry)
4879
4880
4881                    Specifies  the  preferred  size  and position of the image
4882                    window. It is not necessarily obeyed by  all  window  man‐
4883                    agers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.  A
4884                    negative x offset is measured from the right edge  of  the
4885                    screen  to  the  right  edge of the icon, and a negative y
4886                    offset is measured from the bottom edge of the  screen  to
4887                    the bottom edge of the icon.
4888               iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
4889
4890
4891                    Specifies  the preferred size and position of the applica‐
4892                    tion when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by  all
4893                    window  managers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in the
4894                    same manner as in class Geometry.
4895               iconic (class Iconic)
4896
4897
4898                    This resource indicates that you would prefer that the ap‐
4899                    plication's  windows  initially  not  be visible as if the
4900                    windows had be immediately iconified by you.  Window  man‐
4901                    agers may choose not to honor the application's request.
4902               matteColor (class MatteColor)
4903
4904
4905                    Specify  the  color  of  windows. It is used for the back‐
4906                    grounds of windows, menus, and notices.  A  3D  effect  is
4907                    achieved by using highlight and shadow colors derived from
4908                    this color. Default value: #ddd.
4909               name (class Name)
4910
4911
4912                    This resource specifies the name under which resources for
4913                    the  application  should be found. This resource is useful
4914                    in shell aliases to distinguish between invocations of  an
4915                    application,  without resorting to creating links to alter
4916                    the executable file name. The default is  the  application
4917                    name.
4918               sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
4919
4920
4921                    This resource specifies whether animate should attempt use
4922                    shared memory for pixmaps. ImageMagick  must  be  compiled
4923                    with  shared  memory support, and the display must support
4924                    the MIT-SHM extension. Otherwise,  this  resource  is  ig‐
4925                    nored. The default is True.
4926               text_font (class textFont)
4927
4928
4929                    Specifies  the  name of the preferred font to use in fixed
4930                    (typewriter style) formatted text. The default is 14 point
4931                    Courier.
4932               title (class Title)
4933
4934
4935                    This resource specifies the title to be used for the Image
4936                    window. This information is sometimes  used  by  a  window
4937                    manager  to  provide  some  sort of header identifying the
4938                    window. The default is the image file name.
4939
4940

GM BATCH

DESCRIPTION

4943       batch executes an arbitary number of the utility  commands  (e.g.  con‐
4944       vert)  in  the form of a simple linear batch script in order to improve
4945       execution efficiency, and/or to allow use as a  subordinate  co-process
4946       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
4947

EXAMPLES

4949        To  drive 'gm batch' using a shell script (or a program written in any
4950       language), have the script/program send commands to 'gm batch' via  its
4951       standard  input.   Specify  that standard input should be used by using
4952       '-' as the file name.  The following example converts all files  match‐
4953       ing  '*.jpg'  to TIFF format while rotating each file by 90 degrees and
4954       stripping all embedded profiles.  The shell script syntax  is  standard
4955       Unix shell:
4956
4957         for file in *.jpg
4958         do
4959           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4960           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4961           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4962         done | gm batch -echo on -feedback on -
4963
4964       We  can  accomplish the same as the previous example by putting all the
4965       commands in a text file and then specifying the name of the  text  file
4966       as the script to execute:
4967
4968         for file in *.jpg
4969         do
4970           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4971           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4972           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4973         done > script.txt
4974         gm batch -echo on -feedback on script.txt
4975

OPTIONS

4977       Options  are  processed  from  left to right and must appear before any
4978       filename argument.
4979
4980       -echo on|off
4981              command echo on or off
4982
4983              Specify on to enable echoing commands to standard output as they
4984              are read or off to disable.  The default is off.
4985
4986       -escape unix|windows
4987              Parse using unix or windows syntax
4988
4989              Commands must be parsed from the input stream and escaping needs
4990              to be used to protect spaces or quoting characters in the input.
4991              Specify  unix  to use unix-style command line parsing or windows
4992              for Microsoft Windows command shell style parsing.  The  default
4993              depends  on if the software is compiled for Microsoft Windows or
4994              for a Unix-type system (including Cygwin on Microsoft  Windows).
4995              It is recommended to use unix syntax because it is more powerful
4996              and more portable.
4997
4998       -fail text
4999              text to print if a command fails
5000
5001              When feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print  when
5002              the command fails.  The default text is FAIL.
5003
5004       -feedback on|off
5005              enable error feedback
5006
5007              Print  text  (see  -pass  and -fail options) feedback after each
5008              command to indicate the result, the default is off.
5009
5010       -help
5011
5012              Prints batch command help.
5013
5014       -pass text
5015              text to print if a command passes
5016
5017              When feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print  when
5018              the command passes.  The default text is PASS.
5019
5020       -prompt text
5021              Prompt text to use for command line
5022
5023              If  no  filename argument was specified, a simple command prompt
5024              appears where you may enter GraphicsMagick  commands.   The  de‐
5025              fault  prompt  is  GM>.  Use this option to change the prompt to
5026              something else.
5027
5028       -stop-on-error on|off
5029              Specify if command processing stops on error
5030
5031              Normally command processing continues if a command encounters an
5032              error.   Specify  -stop-on-error  on to cause processing to quit
5033              immediately on error.
5034

GM BENCHMARK

DESCRIPTION

5037       benchmark executes an arbitrary gm utility command (e.g.  convert)  for
5038       one  or more loops, and/or a specified execution time, and reports many
5039       execution metrics.  For builds using OpenMP, a mode is provided to exe‐
5040       cute  the  benchmark with an increasing number of threads and provide a
5041       report of speedup and multi-thread execution efficiency.  If  benchmark
5042       is  used to execute a command without any additional benchmark options,
5043       then the command is run once.
5044

EXAMPLES

5046       To obtain benchmark information for a single execution of a command:
5047
5048           gm benchmark convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5049       To obtain benchmark information from 100 iterations of the command:
5050
5051           gm benchmark -iterations 100 convert input.ppm \
5052             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5053       To obtain benchmark information by iterating the command until a speci‐
5054       fied amount of time (in seconds) has been consumed:
5055
5056           gm benchmark -duration 30 convert input.ppm \
5057             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5058       To  obtain  a  full  performance  report  with  an increasing number of
5059       threads (1-32 threads, stepping the number  of  threads  by  four  each
5060       time):
5061
5062           gm benchmark -duration 3 -stepthreads 4 convert \
5063             input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
5064       Here is the interpretation of the output:
5065
5066           threads - number of threads used.
5067           iter - number of command iterations executed.
5068           user - total user time consumed.
5069           total - total elapsed time consumed.
5070           iter/s - number of command iterations per second.
5071           iter/cpu - amount of CPU time consumed per iteration.
5072           speedup - speedup compared with one thread.
5073           karp-flatt - Karp-Flatt measure of speedup efficiency.
5074
5075       Please  note that the reported "speedup" is based on the execution time
5076       of just one thread.  A preliminary warm-up pass is used  before  timing
5077       the first loop in order to ensure that the CPU is brought out of power-
5078       saving modes and that system caches are warmed up.   Most  modern  CPUs
5079       provide  a "turbo" mode where the CPU clock speed is increased (e.g. by
5080       a factor of two) when only one or two cores are  active.   If  the  CPU
5081       grows  excessively  hot (due to insufficient cooling), then it may dial
5082       back its clock rates as a form of thermal  management.   These  factors
5083       result in an under-reporting of speedup compared to if "turbo" mode was
5084       disabled and the CPU does not need to worry about  thermal  management.
5085       The  powertop  utility available under Linux and Solaris provides a way
5086       to observe CPU core clock rates while a benchmark is running.
5087

OPTIONS

5089        Options are processed from left to right and must  appear  before  any
5090       argument.
5091
5092       -duration duration
5093              duration  to  run benchmark Specify the number of seconds to run
5094              the benchmark. The command  is  executed  repeatedly  until  the
5095              specified amount of time has elapsed.
5096
5097       -help
5098
5099              Prints benchmark command help.
5100
5101       -iterations loops
5102              number of command iterations Specify the number of iterations to
5103              run the benchmark. The command is executed repeatedly until  the
5104              specified number of iterations has been reached.
5105
5106       -rawcsv
5107              Print  results  in CSV format Print results in a comma-separated
5108              value (CSV) format which is easy to parse for  plotting  or  im‐
5109              porting into a spreadsheet or database.  The values reported are
5110              threads, iterations, user_time, and elapsed_time.
5111
5112       -stepthreads step
5113              execute a per-thread benchmark ramp
5114               Execute a per-thread benchmark ramp, incrementing the number of
5115              threads at each step by the specified value.  The maximum number
5116              of threads is taken from the standard  OMP_NUM_THREADS  environ‐
5117              ment variable.
5118

GM COMPARE

5120       compare  compares  two  similar  images  using  a specified statistical
5121       method (see -metric) and/or by writing a difference image (-file), with
5122       the  altered pixels annotated using a specified method (see -highlight-
5123       style) and color (see -highlight-color). Reference-image is the  origi‐
5124       nal  image  and  compare-image is the (possibly) altered version, which
5125       should have the same dimensions as reference-image.
5126

EXAMPLES

5128       To compare two images using Mean Square Error (MSE) statistical  analy‐
5129       sis use:
5130
5131           gm compare -metric mse original.miff compare.miff
5132
5133       To create an annotated difference image use:
5134
5135           gm compare -highlight-style assign -highlight-color purple \
5136             -file diff.miff original.miff compare.miff
5137

OPTIONS

5139       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5140       the command line remains in effect only for  the  image  that  follows.
5141       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5142
5143       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5144
5145
5146       -authenticate <string>
5147              decrypt image with this password
5148
5149       -auto-orient
5150              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5151
5152       -colorspace <value>
5153              the type of colorspace
5154
5155       -compress <type>
5156              the type of image compression
5157
5158       -debug <events>
5159              enable debug printout
5160
5161       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5162              add coder/decoder specific options
5163
5164       -density <width>x<height>
5165              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5166
5167       -depth <value>
5168              depth of the image
5169
5170       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5171              specifies the X server to contact
5172
5173       -endian <type>
5174              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5175
5176       -file <filename>
5177              write annotated difference image to file
5178
5179       -help  print usage instructions
5180
5181       -highlight-color <color>
5182              pixel annotation color
5183
5184       -highlight-style <style>
5185              pixel annotation style
5186
5187       -interlace <type>
5188              the type of interlacing scheme
5189
5190       -limit <type> <value>
5191              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
5192              resource limit
5193
5194       -log <string>
5195              Specify format for debug log
5196
5197       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5198
5199       -maximum-error <limit>
5200              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
5201
5202       -metric <metric>
5203              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
5204
5205       -monitor
5206              show progress indication
5207
5208       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5209              chroma subsampling factors
5210
5211       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5212              width and height of the image
5213
5214       -type <type>
5215              the image type
5216
5217       -verbose
5218              print detailed information about the image
5219
5220       -version
5221              print GraphicsMagick version string
5222
5223              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
5224              above.
5225
5226

GM COMPOSITE

5228       composite  composites (combines) images to create new images.  base-im‐
5229       age is the base image and change-image contains the changes.  ouput-im‐
5230       age is the result, and normally has the same dimensions as base-image.
5231
5232
5233       The  optional mask-image can be used to provide opacity information for
5234       change-image when it has none or if you want a different mask.  A  mask
5235       image  is typically grayscale and the same size as base-image. If mask-
5236       image is not grayscale, it is converted to grayscale and the  resulting
5237       intensities are used as opacity information.
5238

EXAMPLES

5240       To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch, use:
5241
5242           gm composite cockatoo.miff perch.ras composite.miff
5243
5244       To compute the difference between images in a series, use:
5245
5246           gm composite -compose difference series.2 series.1
5247                     difference.miff
5248
5249       To  composite  an image of a cockatoo with a perch starting at location
5250       (100,150), use:
5251
5252           gm composite -geometry +100+150 cockatoo.miff
5253                     perch.ras composite.miff
5254
5255       To tile a logo across your image of a cockatoo, use
5256
5257           gm convert +shade 30x60 cockatoo.miff mask.miff
5258           gm composite -compose bumpmap -tile logo.png
5259                     cockatoo.miff mask.miff composite.miff
5260
5261       To composite a red, green, and blue color plane into a single composite
5262       image, try
5263
5264           gm composite -compose CopyGreen green.png red.png
5265                     red-green.png
5266           gm composite -compose CopyBlue blue.png red-green.png
5267                     gm composite.png
5268

OPTIONS

5270       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5271       the command line remains in effect only for  the  image  that  follows.
5272       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5273
5274       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5275
5276
5277       -authenticate <string>
5278              decrypt image with this password
5279
5280       -background <color>
5281              the background color
5282
5283       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5284              blue chromaticity primary point
5285
5286       -colors <value>
5287              preferred number of colors in the image
5288
5289       -colorspace <value>
5290              the type of colorspace
5291
5292       -comment <string>
5293              annotate an image with a comment
5294
5295       -compose <operator>
5296              the type of image composition
5297
5298       -compress <type>
5299              the type of image compression
5300
5301       -debug <events>
5302              enable debug printout
5303
5304       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5305              add coder/decoder specific options
5306
5307       -density <width>x<height>
5308              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5309
5310       -depth <value>
5311              depth of the image
5312
5313       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
5314              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
5315
5316       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5317              specifies the X server to contact
5318
5319       -dispose <method>
5320              GIF disposal method
5321
5322       -dissolve <percent>
5323              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
5324
5325       -dither
5326              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
5327
5328       -encoding <type>
5329              specify the text encoding
5330
5331       -endian <type>
5332              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5333
5334       -filter <type>
5335              use this type of filter when resizing an image
5336
5337       -font <name>
5338              use this font when annotating the image with text
5339
5340       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
5341              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
5342
5343       -gravity <type>
5344              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
5345
5346       -green-primary <x>,<y>
5347              green chromaticity primary point
5348
5349       -help  print usage instructions
5350
5351       -interlace <type>
5352              the type of interlacing scheme
5353
5354       -label <name>
5355              assign a label to an image
5356
5357       -limit <type> <value>
5358              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
5359              resource limit
5360
5361       -log <string>
5362              Specify format for debug log
5363
5364       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5365
5366       -monitor
5367              show progress indication
5368
5369       -monochrome
5370              transform the image to black and white
5371
5372       -negate
5373              replace every pixel with its complementary color
5374
5375       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
5376              size and location of an image canvas
5377
5378       -profile <filename>
5379              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
5380
5381       -quality <value>
5382              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
5383
5384       -recolor <matrix>
5385              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
5386
5387       -red-primary <x>,<y>
5388              red chromaticity primary point
5389
5390       -render
5391              render vector operations
5392
5393       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
5394              Adjust image page offsets
5395
5396       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5397              resize an image
5398
5399       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
5400              rotate the image
5401
5402       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5403              chroma subsampling factors
5404
5405       -scene <value>
5406              set scene number
5407
5408       -set <attribute> <value>
5409              set an image attribute
5410
5411       +set <attribute>
5412              unset an image attribute
5413
5414       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
5415              sharpen the image
5416
5417       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5418              width and height of the image
5419
5420       -stegano <offset>
5421              hide watermark within an image
5422
5423       -stereo
5424              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
5425
5426       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
5427
5428       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5429              resize an image (quickly)
5430
5431       -treedepth <value>
5432              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
5433
5434       -trim  trim an image
5435
5436       -type <type>
5437              the image type
5438
5439       -units <type>
5440              the units of image resolution
5441
5442       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
5443              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
5444
5445       -verbose
5446              print detailed information about the image
5447
5448       -version
5449              print GraphicsMagick version string
5450
5451       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
5452              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
5453
5454       -white-point <x>,<y>
5455              chromaticity white point
5456
5457       -write <filename>
5458              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
5459
5460              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
5461              above.
5462
5463

GM CONJURE

5465       The  Magick  scripting language (MSL) will primarily benefit those that
5466       want to accomplish custom image processing tasks but  do  not  wish  to
5467       program,  or  those  that do not have access to a Perl interpreter or a
5468       compiler.  The interpreter is called conjure and  here  is  an  example
5469       script:
5470
5471           <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5472           <image size="400x400" >
5473             <read filename="image.gif" />
5474             <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5475             <resize geometry="%[dimensions]" />
5476             <get width="width" height="height" />
5477             <print output=
5478               "Image sized from %[base-width]x%[base-height]
5479                to %[width]x%[height].\n" />
5480             <write filename="image.png" />
5481           </image>
5482
5483       invoked with
5484
5485           gm conjure -dimensions 400x400 incantation.msl
5486
5487       All operations will closely follow the key/value pairs defined in Perl‐
5488       Magick, unless otherwise noted.
5489

OPTIONS

5491       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5492       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
5493       specifying the option again with  a  different  effect,  or  if  it  is
5494       changed by a statement in the scripting language.
5495
5496       You  can  define your own keyword/value pairs on the command line.  The
5497       script can then use this information when setting values  by  including
5498       %[keyword]  in  the  string.  For example, if you included "-dimensions
5499       400x400" on the command line, as illustrated  above,  then  any  string
5500       containing   "%[dimensions]"   would  have  400x400  substituted.   The
5501       "%[string]" can be  used  either  an  entire  string,  such  as  geome‐
5502       try="%[dimensions]"  or as a part of a string such as filename="%[base‐
5503       name].png".
5504
5505       The keyword can be any string except for the following reserved strings
5506       (in any upper, lower, or mixed case variant): debug, help, and verbose,
5507       whose usage is described below.
5508
5509       The value can be any string.  If either the keyword or the  value  con‐
5510       tains  white  space  or  any symbols that have special meanings to your
5511       shell such as "#", "|", or "%", enclose the string in  quotation  marks
5512       or use "\" to escape the white space and special symbols.
5513
5514       Keywords  and values are case dependent.  "Key", "key", and "KEY" would
5515       be three different keywords.
5516
5517       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5518
5519
5520       -debug <events>
5521              enable debug printout
5522
5523       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5524              add coder/decoder specific options
5525
5526       -help  print usage instructions
5527
5528       -log <string>
5529              Specify format for debug log
5530
5531       -verbose
5532              print detailed information about the image
5533
5534       -version
5535              print GraphicsMagick version string
5536

MAGICK SCRIPTING LANGUAGE

5538       The Magick Scripting Language (MSL) presently defines the following el‐
5539       ements and their attributes:
5540
5541               <image>
5542
5543                    background, color, id, size
5544
5545                    Define  a new image object.  </image> destroys it. Because
5546                    of this, if you wish  to  reference  multiple  "subimages"
5547                    (aka pages or layers), you can embed one image element in‐
5548                    side of another. For example:
5549
5550
5551
5552                        <image>
5553                        <read filename="input.png" />
5554                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5555                        <image height="base-height" width="base-width">
5556                        <image />
5557                        <write filename="output.mng" />
5558                        </image>
5559
5560
5561
5562                        <image size="400x400" />
5563
5564               <group>
5565
5566
5567                    Define a new group of image objects.  By  default,  images
5568                    are only valid for the life of their <image>element.
5569
5570
5571
5572                        <image>   -- creates the image
5573                        .....     -- do stuff with it
5574                        </image>  -- dispose of the image
5575
5576
5577                    However,  in  a  group, all images in that group will stay
5578                    around for the life of the group:
5579
5580
5581
5582                        <group>                           -- start a group
5583                            <image>                       -- create an image
5584                            ....                          -- do stuff
5585                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5586                            <image>                       -- create another image
5587                            ....                          -- do more stuff
5588                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5589                            <write filename="image.mng" />  -- output
5590                        </group>                          -- dispose of both images
5591
5592               <read>
5593
5594                        filename
5595
5596                    Read a new image from a disk file.
5597
5598
5599
5600                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5601
5602
5603                    To read two images use
5604
5605
5606
5607                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5608                        <read filename="image.png />
5609
5610               <write>
5611
5612                        filename
5613                    Write the image(s) to disk, either as a  single  multiple-
5614                    image file or multiple ones if necessary.
5615
5616
5617
5618                         <write filename=image.tiff" />
5619               <get>
5620
5621                    Get   any  attribute  recognized  by  PerlMagick's  GetAt‐
5622                    tribute() and stores it as an image  attribute  for  later
5623                    use. Currently only width and height are supported.
5624
5625
5626                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5627                        <print output="Image size is %[base-width]x%[base-height].\n" />
5628
5629               <set>
5630
5631                    background,  bordercolor,  clip-mask, colorspace, density,
5632                    magick, mattecolor, opacity.  Set an attribute  recognized
5633                    by PerlMagick's GetAttribute().
5634               <profile>
5635
5636                        [profilename]
5637
5638                    Read  one  or more IPTC, ICC or generic profiles from file
5639                    and assign to image
5640
5641
5642
5643                        <profile iptc="profile.iptc" generic="generic.dat" />
5644
5645
5646                    To remove a specified profile use "!" as the filename eg
5647
5648
5649
5650                        <profile icm="!" iptc="profile.iptc" />
5651
5652               <border>
5653
5654                        fill, geometry, height, width
5655               <blur>
5656
5657                        radius, sigma
5658               <charcoal>
5659
5660                        radius, sigma
5661               <chop>
5662
5663                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5664               <crop>
5665
5666                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5667               <composite>
5668
5669                        compose, geometry, gravity, image, x, y
5670
5671
5672                        <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5673                        <group>
5674                            <image id="image_01">
5675                                <read filename="cloud3.gif"/>
5676                                <resize geometry="250x90"/>
5677                            </image>
5678                            <image id="image_02">
5679                                <read filename="cloud4.gif"/>
5680                                <resize geometry="190x100"/>
5681                            </image>
5682                            <image>
5683                                <read filename="background.jpg"/>
5684                                <composite image="image_01" geometry="+740+470"/>
5685                                <composite image="image_02" geometry="+390+415"/>
5686                            </image>
5687                            <write filename="result.png"/>
5688                        </group>
5689
5690               <despeckle>
5691
5692               <emboss>
5693
5694                        radius, sigma
5695               <enhance>
5696
5697               <equalize>
5698
5699               <edge>
5700
5701                        radius
5702               <flip>
5703
5704               <flop>
5705
5706               <frame>
5707
5708                        fill, geometry, height, width, x, y, inner, outer
5709               <flatten>
5710
5711               <get>
5712
5713                        height, width
5714               <gamma>
5715
5716                        red, green, blue
5717               <image>
5718
5719                        background, color, id, size
5720               <implode>
5721
5722                        amount
5723               <magnify>
5724
5725               <minify>
5726
5727               <medianfilter>
5728
5729                        radius
5730               <normalize>
5731
5732               <oilpaint>
5733
5734                        radius
5735               <print>
5736
5737                        output
5738               <profile>
5739
5740                        [profilename]
5741               <read>
5742
5743               <resize>
5744
5745                        blur, filter, geometry, height, width
5746               <roll>
5747
5748                        geometry, x, y
5749               <rotate>
5750
5751                        degrees
5752               <reducenoise>
5753
5754                        radius
5755               <sample>
5756
5757                        geometry, height, width
5758               <scale>
5759
5760                        geometry, height, width
5761               <sharpen>
5762
5763                        radius, sigma
5764               <shave>
5765
5766                        geometry, height, width
5767               <shear>
5768
5769                        x, y
5770               <solarize>
5771
5772                        threshold
5773               <spread>
5774
5775                        radius
5776               <stegano>
5777
5778                        image
5779               <stereo>
5780
5781                        image
5782               <swirl>
5783
5784                        degrees
5785               <texture>
5786
5787                        image
5788               <threshold>
5789
5790                        threshold
5791               <transparent>
5792
5793                        color
5794               <trim>
5795
5796
5797

GM CONVERT

5799       Convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
5800       with a differing image format. In addition, various types of image pro‐
5801       cessing can be performed on the converted image during  the  conversion
5802       process.  Convert  recognizes  the image formats listed in GraphicsMag‐
5803       ick(1).
5804
5805

EXAMPLES

5807       To make a thumbnail of a JPEG image, use:
5808
5809           gm convert -size 120x120 cockatoo.jpg -resize 120x120
5810                   +profile "*" thumbnail.jpg
5811
5812       In this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder  that
5813       the  image  is  going  to  be downscaled to 120x120, allowing it to run
5814       faster by avoiding returning full-resolution images  to  GraphicsMagick
5815       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
5816       the desired dimensions of the output image.  It will be scaled  so  its
5817       largest  dimension  is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes any ICM,
5818       EXIF, IPTC, or other profiles that might be present in  the  input  and
5819       aren't needed in the thumbnail.
5820
5821       To convert a MIFF image of a cockatoo to a SUN raster image, use:
5822
5823           gm convert cockatoo.miff sun:cockatoo.ras
5824
5825       To  convert  a  multi-page PostScript document to individual FAX pages,
5826       use:
5827
5828           gm convert -monochrome document.ps fax:page
5829
5830       To convert a TIFF image to a PostScript A4 page with the image  in  the
5831       lower left-hand corner, use:
5832
5833           gm convert -page A4+0+0 image.tiff document.ps
5834
5835       To  convert  a  raw  Gray  image  with  a 128 byte header to a portable
5836       graymap, use:
5837
5838           gm convert -depth 8 -size 768x512+128 gray:raw
5839                   image.pgm
5840
5841       In this example, "raw" is the input file.  Its format is "gray" and  it
5842       has  the  dimensions  and number of header bytes specified by the -size
5843       option and the sample depth specified by the -depth option.  The output
5844       file is "image.pgm".  The suffix ".pgm" specifies its format.
5845
5846       To convert a Photo CD image to a TIFF image, use:
5847
5848           gm convert -size 1536x1024 img0009.pcd image.tiff
5849           gm convert img0009.pcd[4] image.tiff
5850
5851       To create a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
5852
5853           gm convert 'vid:*.jpg' directory.miff
5854
5855       To  annotate  an  image  with  blue  text  using font 12x24 at position
5856       (100,100), use:
5857
5858           gm convert -font helvetica -fill blue
5859                   -draw "text 100,100 Cockatoo"
5860                   bird.jpg bird.miff
5861
5862       To tile a 640x480 image with a JPEG texture with bumps use:
5863
5864           gm convert -size 640x480 tile:bumps.jpg tiled.png
5865
5866       To surround an icon with an ornamental border to  use  with  Mosaic(1),
5867       use:
5868
5869           gm convert -mattecolor "#697B8F" -frame 6x6 bird.jpg
5870                   icon.png
5871
5872       To create a MNG animation from a DNA molecule sequence, use:
5873
5874           gm convert -delay 20 dna.* dna.mng
5875

OPTIONS

5877       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5878       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
5879       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
5880       Some options only affect the decoding of images and others only the en‐
5881       coding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
5882
5883       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5884
5885
5886       -adjoin
5887              join images into a single multi-image file
5888
5889       -affine <matrix>
5890              drawing transform matrix
5891
5892       -antialias
5893              remove pixel aliasing
5894
5895       -append
5896              append a set of images
5897
5898       -asc-cdl <spec>
5899              apply ASC CDL color transform
5900
5901       -authenticate <string>
5902              decrypt image with this password
5903
5904       -auto-orient
5905              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5906
5907       -average
5908              average a set of images
5909
5910       -background <color>
5911              the background color
5912
5913       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
5914              pixels below the threshold become black
5915
5916       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5917              blue chromaticity primary point
5918
5919       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
5920              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
5921
5922       -border <width>x<height>
5923              surround the image with a border of color
5924
5925       -bordercolor <color>
5926              the border color
5927
5928       -box <color>
5929              set the color of the annotation bounding box
5930
5931       -channel <type>
5932              the type of channel
5933
5934       -charcoal <factor>
5935              simulate a charcoal drawing
5936
5937       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
5938              remove pixels from the interior of an image
5939
5940       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
5941
5942       -coalesce
5943              merge a sequence of images
5944
5945       -colorize <value>
5946              colorize the image with the pen color
5947
5948       -colors <value>
5949              preferred number of colors in the image
5950
5951       -colorspace <value>
5952              the type of colorspace
5953
5954       -comment <string>
5955              annotate an image with a comment
5956
5957       -compose <operator>
5958              the type of image composition
5959
5960       -compress <type>
5961              the type of image compression
5962
5963       -contrast
5964              enhance or reduce the image contrast
5965
5966       -convolve <kernel>
5967              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
5968
5969       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
5970              preferred size and location of the cropped image
5971
5972       -cycle <amount>
5973              displace image colormap by amount
5974
5975       -debug <events>
5976              enable debug printout
5977
5978       -deconstruct
5979              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
5980
5981       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5982              add coder/decoder specific options
5983
5984       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
5985              display the next image after pausing
5986
5987       -density <width>x<height>
5988              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5989
5990       -depth <value>
5991              depth of the image
5992
5993       -despeckle
5994              reduce the speckles within an image
5995
5996       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5997              specifies the X server to contact
5998
5999       -dispose <method>
6000              GIF disposal method
6001
6002       -dither
6003              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6004
6005       -draw <string>
6006              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
6007
6008       -edge <radius>
6009              detect edges within an image
6010
6011       -emboss <radius>
6012              emboss an image
6013
6014       -encoding <type>
6015              specify the text encoding
6016
6017       -endian <type>
6018              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6019
6020       -enhance
6021              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6022
6023       -equalize
6024              perform histogram equalization to the image
6025
6026       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6027              composite image on background color canvas image
6028
6029       -fill <color>
6030              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
6031
6032       -filter <type>
6033              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6034
6035       -flatten
6036              flatten a sequence of images
6037
6038       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6039
6040       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6041
6042       -font <name>
6043              use this font when annotating the image with text
6044
6045       -format <string>
6046              output formatted image characteristics
6047
6048       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6049              surround the image with an ornamental border
6050
6051       -fuzz <distance>{%}
6052              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
6053
6054       -gamma <value>
6055              level of gamma correction
6056
6057       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
6058              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
6059
6060       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6061              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6062
6063       -gravity <type>
6064              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
6065
6066       -green-primary <x>,<y>
6067              green chromaticity primary point
6068
6069       -hald-clut <clut>
6070              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
6071
6072       -help  print usage instructions
6073
6074       -implode <factor>
6075              implode image pixels about the center
6076
6077       -intent <type>
6078              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
6079
6080       -interlace <type>
6081              the type of interlacing scheme
6082
6083       -label <name>
6084              assign a label to an image
6085
6086       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
6087              perform local adaptive thresholding
6088
6089       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
6090              adjust the level of image contrast
6091
6092       -limit <type> <value>
6093              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
6094              resource limit
6095
6096       -list <type>
6097              the type of list
6098
6099       -log <string>
6100              Specify format for debug log
6101
6102       -loop <iterations>
6103              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
6104
6105       -magnify
6106              magnify the image
6107
6108       -map <filename>
6109              choose a particular set of colors from this image
6110
6111       -mask <filename>
6112              Specify a clipping mask
6113
6114       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6115
6116       -mattecolor <color>
6117              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6118
6119       -median <radius>
6120              apply a median filter to the image
6121
6122       -minify <factor>
6123              minify the image
6124
6125       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
6126              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
6127
6128       -monitor
6129              show progress indication
6130
6131       -monochrome
6132              transform the image to black and white
6133
6134       -morph <frames>
6135              morphs an image sequence
6136
6137       -mosaic
6138              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
6139
6140       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
6141              Simulate motion blur
6142
6143       -negate
6144              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6145
6146       -noise <radius|type>
6147              add or reduce noise in an image
6148
6149       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6150
6151       -normalize
6152              transform image to span the full range of color values
6153
6154       -opaque <color>
6155              change this color to the pen color within the image
6156
6157       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
6158              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
6159              channel
6160
6161       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
6162              ordered dither the image
6163
6164       -orient <orientation>
6165              Set the image orientation attribute
6166
6167       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6168              size and location of an image canvas
6169
6170       -paint <radius>
6171              simulate an oil painting
6172
6173       -pen <color>
6174              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
6175
6176       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
6177
6178       -pointsize <value>
6179              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
6180
6181       -preview <type>
6182              image preview type
6183
6184       -process <command>
6185              process a sequence of images using a process module
6186
6187       -profile <filename>
6188              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
6189
6190       -quality <value>
6191              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6192
6193       -raise <width>x<height>
6194              lighten or darken image edges
6195
6196       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
6197              random threshold the image
6198
6199       -recolor <matrix>
6200              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
6201
6202       -red-primary <x>,<y>
6203              red chromaticity primary point
6204
6205       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6206              apply options to a portion of the image
6207
6208       -render
6209              render vector operations
6210
6211       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
6212              Adjust image page offsets
6213
6214       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
6215              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
6216
6217       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6218              resize an image
6219
6220       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6221              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6222
6223       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6224              rotate the image
6225
6226       -sample <geometry>
6227              scale image using pixel sampling
6228
6229       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6230              chroma subsampling factors
6231
6232       -scale <geometry>
6233              scale the image.
6234
6235       -scene <value>
6236              set scene number
6237
6238       -set <attribute> <value>
6239              set an image attribute
6240
6241       +set <attribute>
6242              unset an image attribute
6243
6244       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6245              segment an image
6246
6247       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
6248              shade the image using a distant light source
6249
6250       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6251              sharpen the image
6252
6253       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
6254              shave pixels from the image edges
6255
6256       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
6257              shear the image along the X or Y axis
6258
6259       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6260              width and height of the image
6261
6262       -solarize <factor>
6263              negate all pixels above the threshold level
6264
6265       -spread <amount>
6266              displace image pixels by a random amount
6267
6268       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
6269
6270       -stroke <color>
6271              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
6272
6273       -strokewidth <value>
6274              set the stroke width
6275
6276       -swirl <degrees>
6277              swirl image pixels about the center
6278
6279       -texture <filename>
6280              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6281
6282       -threshold <value>{%}
6283              threshold the image
6284
6285       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6286              resize an image (quickly)
6287
6288       -tile <filename>
6289              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
6290
6291       -transform
6292              transform the image
6293
6294       -transparent <color>
6295              make this color transparent within the image
6296
6297       -treedepth <value>
6298              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6299
6300       -trim  trim an image
6301
6302       -type <type>
6303              the image type
6304
6305       -units <type>
6306              the units of image resolution
6307
6308       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
6309              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
6310
6311       -use-pixmap
6312              use the pixmap
6313
6314       -verbose
6315              print detailed information about the image
6316
6317       -version
6318              print GraphicsMagick version string
6319
6320       -view <string>
6321              FlashPix viewing parameters
6322
6323       -virtual-pixel <method>
6324              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
6325
6326       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
6327              alter an image along a sine wave
6328
6329       -white-point <x>,<y>
6330              chromaticity white point
6331
6332       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
6333              pixels above the threshold become white
6334
6335       -write <filename>
6336              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
6337
6338              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
6339              above.
6340

GM DISPLAY

6342       Display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
6343       play program. It can display an image on any workstation screen running
6344       an X server. Display can read and write many of the more popular  image
6345       formats (e.g. JPEG, TIFF, PNM, Photo CD, etc.).
6346
6347       With display, you can perform these functions on an image:
6348
6349                o  load an image from a file
6350                o  display the next image
6351                o  display the former image
6352                o  display a sequence of images as a slide show
6353                o  write the image to a file
6354                o  print the image to a PostScript printer
6355                o  delete the image file
6356                o  create a Visual Image Directory
6357                o   select  the  image to display by its thumbnail rather than
6358               name
6359                o  undo last image transformation
6360                o  copy a region of the image
6361                o  paste a region to the image
6362                o  restore the image to its original size
6363                o  refresh the image
6364                o  half the image size
6365                o  double the image size
6366                o  resize the image
6367                o  crop the image
6368                o  cut the image
6369                o  flop image in the horizontal direction
6370                o  flip image in the vertical direction
6371                o  rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise
6372                o  rotate the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise
6373                o  rotate the image
6374                o  shear the image
6375                o  roll the image
6376                o  trim the image edges
6377                o  invert the colors of the image
6378                o  vary the color brightness
6379                o  vary the color saturation
6380                o  vary the image hue
6381                o  gamma correct the image
6382                o  sharpen the image contrast
6383                o  dull the image contrast
6384                o  perform histogram equalization on the image
6385                o  perform histogram normalization on the image
6386                o  negate the image colors
6387                o  convert the image to grayscale
6388                o  set the maximum number of unique colors in the image
6389                o  reduce the speckles within an image
6390                o  eliminate peak noise from an image
6391                o  detect edges within the image
6392                o  emboss an image
6393                o  segment the image by color
6394                o  simulate an oil painting
6395                o  simulate a charcoal drawing
6396                o  annotate the image with text
6397                o  draw on the image
6398                o  edit an image pixel color
6399                o  edit the image matte information
6400                o  composite an image with another
6401                o  add a border to the image
6402                o  surround image with an ornamental border
6403                o  apply image processing techniques to a region of interest
6404                o  display information about the image
6405                o  zoom a portion of the image
6406                o  show a histogram of the image
6407                o  display image to background of a window
6408                o  set user preferences
6409                o  display information about this program
6410                o  discard all images and exit program
6411                o  change the level of magnification
6412                o  display images specified by a World Wide Web (WWW)  uniform
6413               resource locator (URL)
6414
6415

EXAMPLES

6417       To  scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and 480
6418       pixels in height and position the window at location (200,200), use:
6419
6420           gm display -geometry 640x480+200+200! cockatoo.miff
6421
6422       To display an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a  back‐
6423       drop, use:
6424
6425           gm display +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.miff
6426
6427       To tile a slate texture onto the root window, use:
6428
6429           gm display -size 1280x1024 -window root slate.png
6430
6431       To display a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
6432
6433           gm display 'vid:*.jpg'
6434
6435       To  display  a  MAP image that is 640 pixels in width and 480 pixels in
6436       height with 256 colors, use:
6437
6438           gm display -size 640x480+256 cockatoo.map
6439
6440       To display an image of a cockatoo specified with a World Wide Web (WWW)
6441       uniform resource locator (URL), use:
6442
6443           gm display ftp://wizards.dupont.com/images/cockatoo.jpg
6444
6445       To display histogram of an image, use:
6446
6447           gm gm convert file.jpg HISTOGRAM:- | gm display -
6448

OPTIONS

6450       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
6451       the command line remains in effect until it is  explicitly  changed  by
6452       specifying  the  option  again  with a different effect. For example to
6453       display three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with an  un‐
6454       limited number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
6455
6456           gm display -colors 32 cockatoo.miff -noop duck.miff
6457                        -colors 16 macaw.miff
6458
6459       Display  options  can appear on the command line or in your X resources
6460       file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values  specified
6461       in your X resources file.
6462
6463       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
6464
6465
6466       -authenticate <string>
6467              decrypt image with this password
6468
6469       -backdrop
6470              display the image centered on a backdrop.
6471
6472       -background <color>
6473              the background color
6474
6475       -border <width>x<height>
6476              surround the image with a border of color
6477
6478       -bordercolor <color>
6479              the border color
6480
6481       -borderwidth <geometry>
6482              the border width
6483
6484       -colormap <type>
6485              define the colormap type
6486
6487       -colors <value>
6488              preferred number of colors in the image
6489
6490       -colorspace <value>
6491              the type of colorspace
6492
6493       -comment <string>
6494              annotate an image with a comment
6495
6496       -compress <type>
6497              the type of image compression
6498
6499       -contrast
6500              enhance or reduce the image contrast
6501
6502       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6503              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6504
6505       -debug <events>
6506              enable debug printout
6507
6508       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6509              add coder/decoder specific options
6510
6511       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6512              display the next image after pausing
6513
6514       -density <width>x<height>
6515              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6516
6517       -depth <value>
6518              depth of the image
6519
6520       -despeckle
6521              reduce the speckles within an image
6522
6523       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6524              specifies the X server to contact
6525
6526       -dispose <method>
6527              GIF disposal method
6528
6529       -dither
6530              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6531
6532       -edge <radius>
6533              detect edges within an image
6534
6535       -endian <type>
6536              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6537
6538       -enhance
6539              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6540
6541       -filter <type>
6542              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6543
6544       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6545
6546       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6547
6548       -font <name>
6549              use this font when annotating the image with text
6550
6551       -foreground <color>
6552              define the foreground color
6553
6554       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6555              surround the image with an ornamental border
6556
6557       -gamma <value>
6558              level of gamma correction
6559
6560       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6561              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6562
6563       -help  print usage instructions
6564
6565       -iconGeometry <geometry>
6566              specify the icon geometry
6567
6568       -iconic
6569              iconic animation
6570
6571       -immutable
6572              make image immutable
6573
6574       -interlace <type>
6575              the type of interlacing scheme
6576
6577       -label <name>
6578              assign a label to an image
6579
6580       -limit <type> <value>
6581              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
6582              resource limit
6583
6584       -log <string>
6585              Specify format for debug log
6586
6587       -magnify <factor>
6588              magnify the image
6589
6590       -map <type>
6591              display image using this type.
6592
6593       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6594
6595       -mattecolor <color>
6596              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6597
6598       -monitor
6599              show progress indication
6600
6601       -monochrome
6602              transform the image to black and white
6603
6604       -name  name an image
6605
6606       -negate
6607              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6608
6609       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6610
6611       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6612              size and location of an image canvas
6613
6614       +progress
6615              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
6616
6617       -quality <value>
6618              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6619
6620       -raise <width>x<height>
6621              lighten or darken image edges
6622
6623       -remote
6624              perform a X11 remote operation
6625
6626       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6627              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6628
6629       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6630              rotate the image
6631
6632       -sample <geometry>
6633              scale image using pixel sampling
6634
6635       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6636              chroma subsampling factors
6637
6638       -scenes <value-value>
6639              range of image scene numbers to read
6640
6641       -set <attribute> <value>
6642              set an image attribute
6643
6644       +set <attribute>
6645              unset an image attribute
6646
6647       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6648              segment an image
6649
6650       -shared-memory
6651              use shared memory
6652
6653       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6654              sharpen the image
6655
6656       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6657              width and height of the image
6658
6659       -text-font <name>
6660              font for writing fixed-width text
6661
6662       -texture <filename>
6663              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6664
6665       -title <string>
6666              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
6667
6668       -treedepth <value>
6669              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6670
6671       -trim  trim an image
6672
6673       -type <type>
6674              the image type
6675
6676       -update <seconds>
6677               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
6678
6679       -use-pixmap
6680              use the pixmap
6681
6682       -verbose
6683              print detailed information about the image
6684
6685       -version
6686              print GraphicsMagick version string
6687
6688       -visual <type>
6689              animate images using this X visual type
6690
6691       -window <id>
6692              make image the background of a window
6693
6694       -window-group
6695              specify the window group
6696
6697       -write <filename>
6698              write the image to a file [display]
6699
6700              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
6701              above.
6702
6703

MOUSE BUTTONS

6705       The  effects of each button press is described below. Three buttons are
6706       required. If you have a two button mouse, button 1 and 3 are  returned.
6707       Press ALT and button 3 to simulate button 2.
6708
6709       1        Press this button to map or unmap the Command widget . See the
6710              next section for more information about the Command widget.
6711
6712       2       Press and drag to define a region of the image to magnify.
6713
6714       3       Press and drag to choose from a select set of  display(1)  com‐
6715              mands.  This  button behaves differently if the image being dis‐
6716              played is a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile  of
6717              the directory and press this button and drag to select a command
6718              from a pop-up menu.  Choose from these menu items:
6719
6720                  Open
6721                  Next
6722                  Former
6723                  Delete
6724                  Update
6725
6726
6727              If you choose Open, the image represented by the  tile  is  dis‐
6728              played.   To  return  to the visual image directory, choose Next
6729              from the Command widget (refer to  Command  Widget).   Next  and
6730              Former  moves  to  the next or former image respectively. Choose
6731              Delete to delete a particular image tile. Finally, choose Update
6732              to synchronize all the image tiles with their respective images.
6733              See montage and miff for more details.
6734

COMMAND WIDGET

6736       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
6737
6738           File
6739
6740           Open...
6741           Next
6742           Former
6743           Select...
6744           Save...
6745           Print...
6746           Delete...
6747           Canvas...
6748           Visual Directory...
6749           Quit
6750
6751
6752
6753           Edit
6754
6755           Undo
6756           Redo
6757           Cut
6758           Copy
6759           Paste
6760
6761
6762
6763           View
6764
6765           Half Size
6766           Original Size
6767           Double Size
6768           Resize...
6769           Apply
6770           Refresh
6771           Restore
6772
6773
6774
6775           Transform
6776
6777           Crop
6778           Chop
6779           Flop
6780           Flip
6781           Rotate Right
6782           Rotate Left
6783           Rotate...
6784           Shear...
6785           Roll...
6786           Trim Edges
6787
6788
6789
6790           Enhance
6791
6792           Hue...
6793           Saturation...
6794           Brightness...
6795           Gamma...
6796           Spiff...
6797           Dull
6798           Equalize
6799           Normalize
6800           Negate
6801           GRAYscale
6802           Quantize...
6803
6804
6805
6806           Effects
6807
6808           Despeckle
6809           Emboss
6810           Reduce Noise
6811           Add Noise
6812           Sharpen...
6813           Blur...
6814           Threshold...
6815           Edge Detect...
6816           Spread...
6817           Shade...
6818           Raise...
6819           Segment...
6820
6821
6822
6823           F/X
6824
6825           Solarize...
6826           Swirl...
6827           Implode...
6828           Wave...
6829           Oil Paint...
6830           Charcoal Draw...
6831
6832
6833
6834           Image Edit
6835
6836           Annotate...
6837           Draw...
6838           Color...
6839           Matte...
6840           Composite...
6841           Add Border...
6842           Add Frame...
6843           Comment...
6844           Launch...
6845           Region of Interest...
6846
6847
6848
6849           Miscellany
6850
6851           Image Info
6852           Zoom Image
6853           Show Preview...
6854           Show Histogram
6855           Show Matte
6856           Background...
6857           Slide Show
6858           Preferences...
6859
6860
6861
6862           Help
6863
6864           Overview
6865           Browse Documentation
6866           About Display
6867
6868
6869
6870       Menu items with a indented triangle have a sub-menu.  They  are  repre‐
6871       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
6872       pointer to the appropriate menu and press button 1 and drag.  When  you
6873       find  the  desired sub-menu item, release the button and the command is
6874       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
6875       execute a particular command.
6876

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

6878       Accelerators  are  one or two key presses that effect a particular com‐
6879       mand.  The keyboard accelerators that display understands is:
6880
6881           Ctl+O     Press to load an image from a file.
6882           space     Press to display the next image.
6883
6884       If the image is a multi-paged document such as a  PostScript  document,
6885       you  can skip ahead several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6886       ber.  For example to display the fourth page beyond the  current  page,
6887       press 4space.
6888
6889           backspace Press to display the former image.
6890
6891       If  the  image is a multi-paged document such as a PostScript document,
6892       you can skip behind several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6893       ber.   For  example  to  display  the fourth page preceding the current
6894       page, press 4n.
6895
6896           Ctl-S    Press to save the image to a file.
6897           Ctl-P    Press to print the image to a
6898                    PostScript printer.
6899           Ctl-D    Press to delete an image file.
6900           Ctl-N    Press to create a blank canvas.
6901           Ctl-Q    Press to discard all images and exit program.
6902           Ctl+Z    Press to undo last image transformation.
6903           Ctl+R    Press to redo last image transformation.
6904           Ctl-X    Press to cut a region of
6905                    the image.
6906           Ctl-C    Press to copy a region of
6907                    the image.
6908           Ctl-V    Press to paste a region to
6909                    the image.
6910           <        Press to halve the image size.
6911           .        Press to return to the original image size.
6912           >        Press to double the image size.
6913           %        Press to resize the image to a width and height
6914                    you specify.
6915           Cmd-A    Press to make any image transformations
6916                    permanent.
6917                    By default, any image size transformations are
6918                    applied to the original image to create the
6919                    image displayed on the X server.  However, the
6920                    transformations are not permanent (i.e. the
6921                    original image does not change size only the
6922                    X image does). For example, if you press ">"
6923                    the X image will appear to double in size, but
6924                    the original image will in fact remain the same
6925                    size.  To force the original image to double in
6926                    size, press ">" followed by "Cmd-A".
6927           @        Press to refresh the image window.
6928           C        Press to crop the image.
6929           [        Press to chop the image.
6930           H        Press to flop image in the horizontal direction.
6931           V        Press to flip image in the vertical direction.
6932           /        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
6933           \        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees
6934                    counter-clockwise.
6935           *        Press to rotate the image
6936                    the number of degrees you specify.
6937           S        Press to shear the image the number of degrees
6938                    you specify.
6939           R        Press to roll the image.
6940           T        Press to trim the image edges.
6941           Shft-H   Press to vary the color hue.
6942           Shft-S   Press to vary the color saturation.
6943           Shft-L   Press to vary the image brightness.
6944           Shft-G   Press to gamma correct the image.
6945           Shft-C   Press to spiff up the image contrast.
6946           Shft-Z   Press to dull the image contrast.
6947           =        Press to perform histogram equalization on
6948                    the image.
6949           Shft-N   Press to perform histogram normalization on
6950                    the image.
6951           Shft-~   Press to negate the colors of the image.
6952           .        Press to convert the image colors to gray.
6953           Shft-#   Press to set the maximum number of unique
6954                    colors in the image.
6955           F2       Press to reduce the speckles in an image.
6956           F2       Press to emboss an image.
6957           F4       Press to eliminate peak noise from an image.
6958           F5       Press to add noise to an image.
6959           F6       Press to sharpen an image.
6960           F7       Press to blur image an image.
6961           F8       Press to threshold the image.
6962           F9       Press to detect edges within an image.
6963           F10      Press to displace pixels by a random amount.
6964           F11      Press to shade the image using a distant light
6965                    source.
6966           F12      Press to lighten or darken image edges to
6967                    create a 3-D effect.
6968           F13      Press to segment the image by color.
6969           Meta-S   Press to swirl image pixels about the center.
6970           Meta-I   Press to implode image pixels about the center.
6971           Meta-W   Press to alter an image along a sine wave.
6972           Meta-P   Press to simulate an oil painting.
6973           Meta-C   Press to simulate a charcoal drawing.
6974           Alt-X    Press to composite the image
6975                    with another.
6976           Alt-A    Press to annotate the image with text.
6977           Alt-D    Press to draw a line on the image.
6978           Alt-P    Press to edit an image pixel color.
6979           Alt-M    Press to edit the image matte information.
6980           Alt-X    Press to composite the image with another.
6981           Alt-A    Press to add a border to the image.
6982           Alt-F    Press to add a ornamental frame to the image.
6983           Alt-Shft-!   Press to add an image comment.
6984           Ctl-A    Press to apply image processing techniques to a
6985                    region of interest.
6986           Shft-?   Press to display information about the image.
6987           Shft-+   Press to map the zoom image window.
6988           Shft-P   Press to preview an image enhancement, effect,
6989                    or f/x.
6990           F1       Press to display helpful information about
6991                    the "display" utility.
6992           Find     Press to browse documentation about
6993                    GraphicsMagick.
6994           1-9      Press to change the level of magnification.
6995
6996       Use the arrow keys to move the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
6997       within  the  magnify window. Be sure to first map the magnify window by
6998       pressing button 2.
6999
7000       Press ALT and one of the arrow keys to trim off one pixel from any side
7001       of the image.
7002

X RESOURCES

7004       Display  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
7005       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
7006       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
7007
7008       Most display options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, dis‐
7009       play uses the following X resources:
7010
7011       background (class Background)
7012               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window back‐
7013              ground. The default is #ccc.
7014
7015       borderColor (class BorderColor)
7016                Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window bor‐
7017              der. The default is #ccc.
7018
7019       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
7020               Specifies the width in pixels of the image window  border.  The
7021              default is 2.
7022
7023       browseCommand (class browseCommand)
7024                Specifies  the  name  of the preferred browser when displaying
7025              GraphicsMagick documentation. The default is netscape %s.
7026
7027       confirmExit (class ConfirmExit)
7028               Display pops up a dialog box to  confirm  exiting  the  program
7029              when  exiting  the  program.  Set this resource to False to exit
7030              without a confirmation.
7031
7032       displayGamma (class DisplayGamma)
7033               Specifies the gamma of the X server.  You  can  apply  separate
7034              gamma  values  to the red, green, and blue channels of the image
7035              with  a  gamma  value  list  delineated   with   slashes   (i.e.
7036              1.7/2.3/1.2).  The default is 2.2.
7037
7038       displayWarnings (class DisplayWarnings)
7039               Display pops up a dialog box whenever a warning message occurs.
7040              Set this resource to False to ignore warning messages.
7041
7042       font (class FontList)
7043               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in normal  for‐
7044              matted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
7045
7046       font[1-9] (class Font[1-9])
7047               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when annotating
7048              the image window with text. The default fonts are  fixed,  vari‐
7049              able, 5x8, 6x10, 7x13bold, 8x13bold, 9x15bold, 10x20, and 12x24.
7050
7051       foreground (class Foreground)
7052                Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the image
7053              window.  The default is black.
7054
7055       gammaCorrect (class gammaCorrect)
7056               This resource, if true, will lighten  or  darken  an  image  of
7057              known gamma to match the gamma of the display (see resource dis‐
7058              playGamma). The default is True.
7059
7060       geometry (class Geometry)
7061               Specifies the preferred size and position of the image  window.
7062              It is not necessarily obeyed by all window managers.
7063
7064              Offsets,  if  present,  are handled in X(1) style.  A negative x
7065              offset is measured from the right edge  of  the  screen  to  the
7066              right edge of the icon, and a negative y offset is measured from
7067              the bottom edge of the screen to the bottom edge of the icon.
7068
7069       iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
7070               Specifies the preferred size and position  of  the  application
7071              when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
7072              agers.
7073
7074              Offsets, if present, are handled in the same manner as in  class
7075              Geometry.
7076
7077       iconic (class Iconic)
7078               This resource indicates that you would prefer that the applica‐
7079              tion's windows initially not be visible as if the windows had be
7080              immediately  iconified by you. Window managers may choose not to
7081              honor the application's request.
7082
7083       magnify (class Magnify)
7084               specifies an integral factor by which the image should  be  en‐
7085              larged.  The default is 3.  This value only affects the magnifi‐
7086              cation window which is invoked with button number  3  after  the
7087              image is displayed.
7088
7089       matteColor (class MatteColor)
7090               Specify the color of windows. It is used for the backgrounds of
7091              windows, menus, and notices. A 3D effect is  achieved  by  using
7092              highlight  and  shadow  colors  derived from this color. Default
7093              value: #697B8F.
7094
7095       name (class Name)
7096               This resource specifies the name under which resources for  the
7097              application  should  be  found. This resource is useful in shell
7098              aliases to distinguish between invocations  of  an  application,
7099              without resorting to creating links to alter the executable file
7100              name. The default is the application name.
7101
7102       pen[1-9] (class Pen[1-9])
7103               Specifies the color of the preferred font to use when  annotat‐
7104              ing  the  image  window with text. The default colors are black,
7105              blue, green, cyan, gray, red, magenta, yellow, and white.
7106
7107       printCommand (class PrintCommand)
7108               This command is executed whenever Print is issued.  In general,
7109              it  is  the command to print PostScript to your printer. Default
7110              value: lp -c -s %i.
7111
7112       sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
7113               This resource specifies  whether  display  should  attempt  use
7114              shared  memory for pixmaps. GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
7115              shared memory support, and the display must support the  MIT-SHM
7116              extension.  Otherwise,  this resource is ignored. The default is
7117              True.
7118
7119       textFont (class textFont)
7120               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
7121              writer style) formatted text. The default is 14 point Courier.
7122
7123       title (class Title)
7124               This resource specifies the title to be used for the image win‐
7125              dow. This information is sometimes used by a window  manager  to
7126              provide  a header identifying the window. The default is the im‐
7127              age file name.
7128
7129       undoCache (class UndoCache)
7130               Specifies, in mega-bytes, the amount of memory in the undo edit
7131              cache.   Each  time you modify the image it is saved in the undo
7132              edit cache as long as memory is available. You can  subsequently
7133              undo  one  or  more  of these transformations. The default is 16
7134              Megabytes.
7135
7136       usePixmap (class UsePixmap)
7137               Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this resource
7138              to  True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This option is use‐
7139              ful if your image exceeds the dimensions of your  server  screen
7140              and  you  intend  to  pan the image. Panning is much faster with
7141              Pixmaps than with a XImage. Pixmaps are  considered  a  precious
7142              resource, use them with discretion.
7143
7144              To set the geometry of the Magnify or Pan or window, use the ge‐
7145              ometry resource.  For example, to set the Pan window geometry to
7146              256x256, use:
7147
7148                  gm display.pan.geometry: 256x256
7149

IMAGE LOADING

7151       To  select  an  image to display, choose Open of the File sub-menu from
7152       the Command widget. A file browser is displayed.  To choose a  particu‐
7153       lar  image file, move the pointer to the filename and press any button.
7154       The filename is copied to the text window. Next, press  Open  or  press
7155       the  RETURN  key.  Alternatively,  you can type the image file name di‐
7156       rectly into the text window. To descend directories, choose a directory
7157       name  and  press  the  button twice quickly. A scrollbar allows a large
7158       list of filenames to be moved through the viewing area  if  it  exceeds
7159       the size of the list area.
7160
7161       You can trim the list of file names by using shell globbing characters.
7162       For example, type *.jpg to list only files that end with .jpg.
7163
7164       To select your image from the X server screen instead of from  a  file,
7165       Choose Grab of the Open widget.
7166

VISUAL IMAGE DIRECTORY

7168       To create a Visual Image Directory, choose Visual Directory of the File
7169       sub-menu from the Command widget . A file browser is displayed. To cre‐
7170       ate  a Visual Image Directory from all the images in the current direc‐
7171       tory, press Directory or press the RETURN key.  Alternatively, you  can
7172       select a set of image names by using shell globbing characters. For ex‐
7173       ample, type *.jpg to include only files that end with .jpg. To  descend
7174       directories,  choose  a  directory  name  and  press  the  button twice
7175       quickly. A scrollbar allows a large  list  of  filenames  to  be  moved
7176       through the viewing area if it exceeds the size of the list area.
7177
7178       After  you  select  a set of files, they are turned into thumbnails and
7179       tiled onto a single image. Now move the pointer to a particular  thumb‐
7180       nail  and press button 3 and drag. Finally, select Open. The image rep‐
7181       resented by the thumbnail is displayed at its full  size.  Choose  Next
7182       from  the  File  sub-menu of the Command widget to return to the Visual
7183       Image Directory.
7184

IMAGE CUTTING

7186       Note that cut information for image window is  not  retained  for  col‐
7187       ormapped  X  server  visuals (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor, GRAYScale,
7188       PseudoColor).  Correct cutting behavior may require a TrueColor or  Di‐
7189       rectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7190
7191       To  begin,  press choose Cut of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7192       get. Alternatively, press F3 in the image window.
7193
7194       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7195       window.  You  are  now in cut mode. In cut mode, the Command widget has
7196       these options:
7197
7198           Help
7199           Dismiss
7200
7201
7202       To define a cut region, press button 1 and drag. The cut region is  de‐
7203       fined  by  a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7204       lows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cut  region,  release
7205       the  button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the Command
7206       widget has these options:
7207
7208           Cut
7209           Help
7210           Dismiss
7211
7212
7213       You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the  cut  rec‐
7214       tangle  corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Cut to
7215       commit your copy region. To exit without cutting the image, press  Dis‐
7216       miss.
7217

IMAGE COPYING

7219       To  begin, press choose Copy of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7220       get. Alternatively, press F4 in the image window.
7221
7222       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7223       window.  You are now in copy mode. In copy mode, the Command widget has
7224       these options:
7225
7226           Help
7227           Dismiss
7228
7229
7230       To define a copy region, press button 1 and drag. The  copy  region  is
7231       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7232       lows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the copy region,  release
7233       the  button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the Command
7234       widget has these options:
7235
7236           Copy
7237           Help
7238           Dismiss
7239
7240
7241       You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the copy  rec‐
7242       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Copy to
7243       commit your copy region. To exit without copying the image, press  Dis‐
7244       miss.
7245

IMAGE PASTING

7247       To begin, press choose Paste of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7248       get. Alternatively, press F5 in the image window.
7249
7250       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7251       window.  You are now in Paste mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7252       In Paste mode, the Command widget has these options:
7253
7254           Operators
7255
7256           over
7257           in
7258           out
7259           atop
7260           xor
7261           plus
7262           minus
7263           add
7264           subtract
7265           difference
7266           multiply
7267           bumpmap
7268           replace
7269
7270           Help
7271           Dismiss
7272
7273
7274       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7275       widget.  How  each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7276       the image currently displayed on your X server and image is  the  image
7277       obtained with the File Browser widget.
7278
7279       over    The result is the union of the two image shapes, with image ob‐
7280              scuring image window in the region of overlap.
7281
7282       in      The result is simply image cut by the shape  of  image  window.
7283              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7284
7285       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7286              out.
7287
7288       atop    The result is the same shape as image window,  with  image  ob‐
7289              scuring  image  window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7290              differs from over because the portion  of  image  outside  image
7291              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7292
7293       xor      The  result is the image data from both image and image window
7294              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7295
7296       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7297              cropped  to  the  maximum value (no overflow). This operation is
7298              independent of the matte channels.
7299
7300       minus   The result of image - image window, with underflow  cropped  to
7301              zero.  The  matte channel is ignored (set to opaque, full cover‐
7302              age).
7303
7304       add     The result of image +  image  window,  with  overflow  wrapping
7305              around (mod MaxRGB+1).
7306
7307       subtract
7308                The  result  of  image - image window, with underflow wrapping
7309              around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and  subtract  operators  can  be
7310              used to perform reversible transformations.
7311
7312       difference
7313                The  result  of  abs(image - image window). This is useful for
7314              comparing two very similar images.
7315
7316       multiply
7317               The result of image * image window. This is useful for the cre‐
7318              ation of drop-shadows.
7319
7320       bumpmap
7321               The result of image window shaded by window.
7322
7323       replace
7324              The  resulting  image is image window replaced with image.  Here
7325              the matte information is ignored.
7326
7327              The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel  in  the
7328              image  for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7329              mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for  the  image.
7330              This  is  the  case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7331              inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on  the
7332              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7333              ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color  to  pixel  location
7334              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7335              a matte channel.
7336
7337              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7338              colormapped  X  server  visuals  (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor,
7339              GrayScale, PseudoColor).  Correct compositing behavior  may  re‐
7340              quire a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7341
7342              Choosing  a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7343              is replace.  However, you must choose a  location  to  composite
7344              your  image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7345              releasing and an outline of the image will appear  to  help  you
7346              identify your location.
7347
7348              The  actual  colors  of  the pasted image is saved. However, the
7349              color that appears in image window may be different.  For  exam‐
7350              ple,  on  a  monochrome screen image window will appear black or
7351              white even though your pasted image may have many colors. If the
7352              image  is saved to a file it is written with the correct colors.
7353              To assure the correct colors are saved in the final  image,  any
7354              PseudoClass  image is promoted to DirectClass.  To force a Pseu‐
7355              doClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7356

IMAGE CROPPING

7358       To begin, press choose Crop of the Transform submenu from  the  Command
7359       widget. Alternatively, press C in the image window.
7360
7361       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7362       window. You are now in crop mode. In crop mode, the Command widget  has
7363       these options:
7364
7365           Help
7366           Dismiss
7367
7368
7369       To  define a cropping region, press button 1 and drag. The cropping re‐
7370       gion is defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as
7371       it  follows  the  pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cropping re‐
7372       gion, release the button. You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode,
7373       the Command widget has these options:
7374
7375           Crop
7376           Help
7377           Dismiss
7378
7379
7380       You  can  make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cropping
7381       rectangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Crop
7382       to  commit  your  cropping  region. To exit without cropping the image,
7383       press Dismiss.
7384

IMAGE CHOPPING

7386       An image is chopped interactively. There is no command line argument to
7387       chop an image. To begin, choose Chop of the Transform sub-menu from the
7388       Command widget. Alternatively, press [ in the Image window.
7389
7390       You are now in Chop mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.  In  Chop
7391       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7392
7393           Direction
7394
7395           horizontal
7396           vertical
7397
7398           Help
7399           Dismiss
7400
7401
7402       If  the  you choose the horizontal direction (this is the default), the
7403       area of the image between the two horizontal endpoints of the chop line
7404       is  removed.  Otherwise, the area of the image between the two vertical
7405       endpoints of the chop line is removed.
7406
7407       Select a location within the image window to begin your chop, press and
7408       hold  any button. Next, move the pointer to another location in the im‐
7409       age.  As you move a line will connect  the  initial  location  and  the
7410       pointer. When you release the button, the area within the image to chop
7411       is determined by which direction you choose from the Command widget.
7412
7413       To cancel the image chopping, move the pointer  back  to  the  starting
7414       point of the line and release the button.
7415

IMAGE ROTATION

7417       Press  the  / key to rotate the image 90 degrees or \ to rotate -90 de‐
7418       grees.  To interactively choose the  degree  of  rotation,  choose  Ro‐
7419       tate...   of  the  Transform submenu from the Command Widget.  Alterna‐
7420       tively, press * in the image window.
7421
7422       A small horizontal line is drawn next to the pointer. You  are  now  in
7423       rotate  mode.  To  exit immediately, press Dismiss. In rotate mode, the
7424       Command widget has these options:
7425
7426           Pixel Color
7427
7428           black
7429           blue
7430           cyan
7431           green
7432           gray
7433           red
7434           magenta
7435           yellow
7436           white
7437           Browser...
7438
7439           Direction
7440
7441           horizontal
7442           vertical
7443
7444           Help
7445           Dismiss
7446
7447
7448       Choose a background color from the  Pixel  Color  sub-menu.  Additional
7449       background  colors  can  be  specified  with the color browser. You can
7450       change the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7451
7452       If you choose the color browser and press  Grab,  you  can  select  the
7453       background  color  by  moving  the  pointer to the desired color on the
7454       screen and press any button.
7455
7456       Choose a point in the image window and  press  this  button  and  hold.
7457       Next,  move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move a
7458       line connects the initial location and the pointer.  When  you  release
7459       the  button, the degree of image rotation is determined by the slope of
7460       the line you just drew. The slope is  relative  to  the  direction  you
7461       choose from the Direction sub-menu of the Command widget.
7462
7463       To  cancel  the  image  rotation, move the pointer back to the starting
7464       point of the line and release the button.
7465

IMAGE ANNOTATION

7467       An image is annotated interactively. There is no command line  argument
7468       to  annotate an image. To begin, choose Annotate of the Image Edit sub-
7469       menu from the Command widget. Alternatively, press a in the image  win‐
7470       dow.
7471
7472       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7473       window. You are now in annotate mode. To exit immediately,  press  Dis‐
7474       miss.  In annotate mode, the Command widget has these options:
7475
7476
7477       Font Name
7478
7479
7480       fixed
7481
7482       variable
7483
7484       5x8
7485
7486       6x10
7487
7488       7x13bold
7489
7490       8x13bold
7491
7492       9x15bold
7493
7494       10x20
7495
7496       12x24
7497
7498       Browser...
7499
7500
7501       Font Color
7502
7503
7504       black
7505
7506       blue
7507
7508       cyan
7509
7510       green
7511
7512       gray
7513
7514       red
7515
7516       magenta
7517
7518       yellow
7519
7520       white
7521
7522       transparent
7523
7524       Browser...
7525
7526
7527       Box Color
7528
7529
7530       black
7531
7532       blue
7533
7534       cyan
7535
7536       green
7537
7538       gray
7539
7540       red
7541
7542       magenta
7543
7544       yellow
7545
7546       white
7547
7548       transparent
7549
7550       Browser...
7551
7552
7553       Rotate Text
7554
7555
7556       -90
7557
7558       -45
7559
7560       -30
7561
7562       0
7563
7564       30
7565
7566       45
7567
7568       90
7569
7570       180
7571
7572       Dialog...
7573
7574
7575       Help
7576
7577       Dismiss
7578
7579
7580       Choose  a  font name from the Font Name sub-menu. Additional font names
7581       can be specified with the font browser. You can change the  menu  names
7582       by setting the X resources font1 through font9.
7583
7584       Choose  a font color from the Font Color sub-menu. Additional font col‐
7585       ors can be specified with the color browser. You can  change  the  menu
7586       colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7587
7588       If you select the color browser and press Grab, you can choose the font
7589       color by moving the pointer to the desired  color  on  the  screen  and
7590       press any button.
7591
7592       If  you choose to rotate the text, choose Rotate Text from the menu and
7593       select an angle. Typically you will only want to  rotate  one  line  of
7594       text at a time. Depending on the angle you choose, subsequent lines may
7595       end up overwriting each other.
7596
7597       Choosing a font and its color is optional. The default  font  is  fixed
7598       and  the default color is black. However, you must choose a location to
7599       begin entering text and press a button. An  underscore  character  will
7600       appear  at  the location of the pointer. The cursor changes to a pencil
7601       to indicate you are in text mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7602
7603       In text mode, any key presses will display the character at  the  loca‐
7604       tion  of  the  underscore and advance the underscore cursor. Enter your
7605       text and once completed press Apply to finish your image annotation. To
7606       correct  errors  press  BACK  SPACE.  To delete an entire line of text,
7607       press DELETE.  Any text that exceeds the boundaries of the image window
7608       is automatically continued onto the next line.
7609
7610       The  actual  color you request for the font is saved in the image. How‐
7611       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7612       example,  on  a  monochrome  screen the text will appear black or white
7613       even if you choose the color red as the font color. However, the  image
7614       saved  to  a  file with -write is written with red lettering. To assure
7615       the correct color text in the final image,  any  PseudoClass  image  is
7616       promoted  to DirectClass (see miff(5)). To force a PseudoClass image to
7617       remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7618

IMAGE COMPOSITING

7620       An image composite is created interactively. There is no  command  line
7621       argument to composite an image. To begin, choose Composite of the Image
7622       Edit from the Command widget. Alternatively, press x in the Image  win‐
7623       dow.
7624
7625       First  a  popup  window  is  displayed requesting you to enter an image
7626       name.  Press Composite, Grab or type a file name. Press Cancel  if  you
7627       choose  not to create a composite image. When you choose Grab, move the
7628       pointer to the desired window and press any button.
7629
7630       If the Composite image does not have any matte information, you are in‐
7631       formed  and  the  file  browser is displayed again. Enter the name of a
7632       mask image. The image is typically grayscale and the same size  as  the
7633       composite  image.  If  the  image  is not grayscale, it is converted to
7634       grayscale and the resulting intensities are used as matte information.
7635
7636       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7637       window.  You are now in composite mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7638       miss.  In composite mode, the Command widget has these options:
7639
7640
7641       Operators
7642
7643
7644       over
7645
7646       in
7647
7648       out
7649
7650       atop
7651
7652       xor
7653
7654       plus
7655
7656       minus
7657
7658       add
7659
7660       subtract
7661
7662       difference
7663
7664       bumpmap
7665
7666       replace
7667
7668
7669       Blend
7670
7671       Displace
7672
7673       Help
7674
7675       Dismiss
7676
7677
7678       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7679       widget.  How  each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7680       the image currently displayed on your X server and image is  the  image
7681       obtained
7682
7683       over    The result is the union of the two image shapes, with image ob‐
7684              scuring image window in the region of overlap.
7685
7686       in      The result is simply image cut by the shape  of  image  window.
7687              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7688
7689       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7690              out.
7691
7692       atop    The result is the same shape as image window,  with  image  ob‐
7693              scuring  image  window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7694              differs from over because the portion  of  image  outside  image
7695              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7696
7697       xor      The  result is the image data from both image and image window
7698              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7699
7700       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7701              cropped  to  255 (no overflow). This operation is independent of
7702              the matte channels.
7703
7704       minus   The result of image - image window, with underflow  cropped  to
7705              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to 255, full coverage).
7706
7707       add      The  result  of  image  + image window, with overflow wrapping
7708              around (mod 256).
7709
7710       subtract
7711               The result of image - image  window,  with  underflow  wrapping
7712              around  (mod 256). The add and subtract operators can be used to
7713              perform reversible transformations.
7714
7715       difference
7716               The result of abs(image - image window).  This  is  useful  for
7717              comparing two very similar images.
7718
7719       bumpmap
7720               The result of image window shaded by window.
7721
7722       replace
7723                The resulting image is image window replaced with image.  Here
7724              the matte information is ignored.
7725
7726              The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel  in  the
7727              image  for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7728              mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for  the  image.
7729              This  is  the  case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7730              inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on  the
7731              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7732              ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color  to  pixel  location
7733              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7734              a matte channel.
7735
7736              If you choose blend, the composite operator becomes  over.   The
7737              image  matte channel percent transparency is initialized to fac‐
7738              tor.  The image window is  initialized  to  (100-factor).  Where
7739              factor is the value you specify in the Dialog widget.
7740
7741              Displace  shifts  the  image pixels as defined by a displacement
7742              map.  With this option, image is used  as  a  displacement  map.
7743              Black,  within  the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
7744              placement. White is a maximum negative displacement  and  middle
7745              gray  is  neutral.  The  displacement is scaled to determine the
7746              pixel shift. By default, the displacement applies  in  both  the
7747              horizontal  and  vertical  directions.  However,  if you specify
7748              mask, image is the horizontal X displacement and mask the verti‐
7749              cal Y displacement.
7750
7751              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7752              colormapped X server visuals  (e.g.   StaticColor,  StaticColor,
7753              GrayScale,  PseudoColor).   Correct compositing behavior may re‐
7754              quire a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7755
7756              Choosing a composite operator is optional. The default  operator
7757              is  replace.   However,  you must choose a location to composite
7758              your image and press button 1. Press and hold the button  before
7759              releasing  and  an  outline of the image will appear to help you
7760              identify your location.
7761
7762              The actual colors of the composite image is saved. However,  the
7763              color  that  appears in image window may be different. For exam‐
7764              ple, on a monochrome screen Image window will  appear  black  or
7765              white even though your composited image may have many colors. If
7766              the image is saved to a file it is written with the correct col‐
7767              ors.  To assure the correct colors are saved in the final image,
7768              any PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass (see miff).  To
7769              force a PseudoClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7770

COLOR EDITING

7772       Changing  the  the color of a set of pixels is performed interactively.
7773       There is no command line argument to edit a  pixel.  To  begin,  choose
7774       Color  from  the  Image  Edit  submenu of the Command widget.  Alterna‐
7775       tively, press c in the image window.
7776
7777       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7778       window. You are now in color edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7779       miss.  In color edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7780
7781
7782       Method
7783
7784
7785       point
7786
7787       replace
7788
7789       floodfill
7790
7791       reset
7792
7793
7794       Pixel Color
7795
7796
7797       black
7798
7799       blue
7800
7801       cyan
7802
7803       green
7804
7805       gray
7806
7807       red
7808
7809       magenta
7810
7811       yellow
7812
7813       white
7814
7815       Browser...
7816
7817
7818       Border Color
7819
7820
7821       black
7822
7823       blue
7824
7825       cyan
7826
7827       green
7828
7829       gray
7830
7831       red
7832
7833       magenta
7834
7835       yellow
7836
7837       white
7838
7839       Browser...
7840
7841
7842       Fuzz
7843
7844
7845       0
7846
7847       2
7848
7849       4
7850
7851       8
7852
7853       16
7854           Dialog...
7855
7856
7857       Undo
7858
7859       Help
7860
7861       Dismiss
7862
7863
7864       Choose a color editing method from the Method sub-menu of  the  Command
7865       widget.  The  point method recolors any pixel selected with the pointer
7866       unless the button is released. The replace method  recolors  any  pixel
7867       that  matches  the  color  of the pixel you select with a button press.
7868       Floodfill recolors any pixel that matches the color of  the  pixel  you
7869       select  with  a  button  press and is a neighbor.  Whereas filltoborder
7870       changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel that is  not  the  border
7871       color.  Finally reset changes the entire image to the designated color.
7872
7873       Next,  choose  a  pixel color from the Pixel Color sub-menu. Additional
7874       pixel colors can be specified with the color browser.  You  can  change
7875       the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7876
7877       Now  press button 1 to select a pixel within the Image window to change
7878       its color. Additional pixels may be  recolored  as  prescribed  by  the
7879       method you choose. additional pixels by increasing the Delta value.
7880
7881       If  the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning your
7882       pointer within the image (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can se‐
7883       lect  a  pixel  to  recolor  from  within  the Magnify widget. Move the
7884       pointer to the Magnify widget and position the pixel  with  the  cursor
7885       control keys. Finally, press a button to recolor the selected pixel (or
7886       pixels).
7887
7888       The actual color you request for the pixels is saved in the image. How‐
7889       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7890       example, on a monochrome screen the pixel will appear  black  or  white
7891       even if you choose the color red as the pixel color. However, the image
7892       saved to a file with -write is written with red pixels. To  assure  the
7893       correct  color  text  in the final image, any PseudoClass image is pro‐
7894       moted to DirectClass To force a PseudoClass  image  to  remain  Pseudo‐
7895       Class, use -colors.
7896

MATTE EDITING

7898       Matte information within an image is useful for some operations such as
7899       image compositing. This extra channel usually defines a mask which rep‐
7900       resents  a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image. This is the case when
7901       matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels inside the shape, zero outside,
7902       and between zero and 255 on the boundary.
7903
7904       Setting  the matte information in an image is done interactively. There
7905       is no command line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, and choose Matte
7906       of the Image Edit sub-menu from the Command widget.
7907
7908       Alternatively, press m in the image window.
7909
7910       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7911       window. You are now in matte edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7912       miss.  In matte edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7913
7914
7915       Method
7916
7917
7918       point
7919
7920       replace
7921
7922       floodfill
7923
7924       reset
7925
7926
7927       Border Color
7928
7929
7930       black
7931
7932       blue
7933
7934       cyan
7935
7936       green
7937
7938       gray
7939
7940       red
7941
7942       magenta
7943
7944       yellow
7945
7946       white
7947
7948       Browser...
7949
7950
7951       Fuzz
7952
7953
7954       0
7955
7956       2
7957
7958       4
7959
7960       8
7961
7962       16
7963           Dialog...
7964
7965
7966       Matte
7967
7968       Undo
7969
7970       Help
7971
7972       Dismiss
7973
7974       Choose  a  matte editing method from the Method sub-menu of the Command
7975       widget. The point method changes the matte value of the any  pixel  se‐
7976       lected  with  the  pointer  until  the  button is released. The replace
7977       method changes the matte value of any pixel that matches the  color  of
7978       the  pixel  you select with a button press. Floodfill changes the matte
7979       value of any pixel that matches the color of the pixel you select  with
7980       a  button  press  and  is a neighbor. Whereas filltoborder recolors any
7981       neighbor pixel that is not the border color. Finally reset changes  the
7982       entire  image  to the designated matte value.  Choose Matte Value and a
7983       dialog appears requesting a matte value.  Enter a value between  0  and
7984       255. This value is assigned as the matte value of the selected pixel or
7985       pixels.  Now, press any button to select a pixel within the Image  win‐
7986       dow  to change its matte value. You can change the matte value of addi‐
7987       tional pixels by increasing the Delta value. The Delta value  is  first
7988       added  then  subtracted  from  the  red,  green, and blue of the target
7989       color. Any pixels within the range also have their matte value updated.
7990       If  the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning your
7991       pointer within the image (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can se‐
7992       lect  a pixel to change the matte value from within the Magnify widget.
7993       Move the pointer to the Magnify widget and position the pixel with  the
7994       cursor  control keys. Finally, press a button to change the matte value
7995       of the selected pixel (or pixels).  Matte information is only valid  in
7996       a  DirectClass  image.  Therefore, any PseudoClass image is promoted to
7997       DirectClass. Note that matte information for  PseudoClass  is  not  re‐
7998       tained for colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor,
7999       GrayScale, PseudoColor) unless you immediately save  your  image  to  a
8000       file  (refer  to  Write).  Correct matte editing behavior may require a
8001       TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
8002

IMAGE DRAWING

8004       An image is drawn upon interactively. There is no command line argument
8005       to  draw  on an image. To begin, choose Draw of the Image Edit sub-menu
8006       from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press d in the image window.
8007
8008       The cursor changes to a crosshair to indicate you are in draw mode.  To
8009       exit  immediately,  press Dismiss. In draw mode, the Command widget has
8010       these options:
8011
8012
8013       Primitive
8014
8015
8016       point
8017
8018       line
8019
8020       rectangle
8021
8022       fill rectangle
8023
8024       circle
8025
8026       fill circle
8027
8028       ellipse
8029
8030       fill ellipse
8031
8032       polygon
8033
8034       fill polygon
8035
8036
8037       Color
8038
8039
8040       black
8041
8042       blue
8043
8044       cyan
8045
8046       green
8047
8048       gray
8049
8050       red
8051
8052       magenta
8053
8054       yellow
8055
8056       white
8057
8058       transparent
8059
8060       Browser...
8061
8062
8063       Stipple
8064
8065
8066       Brick
8067
8068       Diagonal
8069
8070       Scales
8071
8072       Vertical
8073
8074       Wavy
8075
8076       Translucent
8077
8078       Opaque
8079
8080       Open...
8081
8082
8083       Width
8084
8085
8086       1
8087
8088       2
8089
8090       4
8091
8092       8
8093
8094       16
8095           Dialog...
8096
8097
8098       Undo
8099
8100       Help
8101
8102       Dismiss
8103
8104       Choose a drawing primitive from the Primitive sub-menu.
8105
8106       Next, choose a color from the Color sub-menu. Additional colors can  be
8107       specified  with  the  color  browser. You can change the menu colors by
8108       setting the X resources pen1 through pen9. The  transparent  color  up‐
8109       dates the image matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8110
8111       If  you  choose  the  color  browser and press Grab, you can select the
8112       primitive color by moving the pointer  to  the  desired  color  on  the
8113       screen  and  press  any button. The transparent color updates the image
8114       matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8115
8116       Choose a stipple, if appropriate, from the Stipple sub-menu. Additional
8117       stipples can be specified with the file browser. Stipples obtained from
8118       the file browser must be on disk in the X11 bitmap format.
8119
8120       Choose a line width, if appropriate, from the Width sub-menu. To choose
8121       a specific width select the Dialog widget.
8122
8123       Choose  a  point in the image window and press button 1 and hold. Next,
8124       move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move, a  line
8125       connects  the  initial  location  and the pointer. When you release the
8126       button, the image is updated with the  primitive  you  just  drew.  For
8127       polygons,  the  image  is updated when you press and release the button
8128       without moving the pointer.
8129
8130       To cancel image drawing, move the pointer back to the starting point of
8131       the line and release the button.
8132

REGION OF INTEREST

8134       To  begin,  press choose Region of Interest of the Pixel Transform sub-
8135       menu from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press R in the image win‐
8136       dow.
8137
8138       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
8139       window. You are now in region of interest mode. In region  of  interest
8140       mode, the Command widget has these options:
8141
8142
8143       Help
8144
8145       Dismiss
8146
8147
8148       To  define a region of interest, press button 1 and drag. The region of
8149       interest is defined by a highlighted rectangle  that  expands  or  con‐
8150       tracts  as  it follows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the re‐
8151       gion of interest, release the button. You are now in apply mode. In ap‐
8152       ply mode the Command widget has these options:
8153
8154
8155       File
8156
8157
8158       Save...
8159
8160       Print...
8161
8162
8163       Edit
8164
8165
8166       Undo
8167
8168       Redo
8169
8170
8171       Transform
8172
8173
8174       Flip
8175
8176       Flop
8177
8178       Rotate Right
8179
8180       Rotate Left
8181
8182
8183       Enhance
8184
8185
8186       Hue...
8187
8188       Saturation...
8189
8190       Brightness...
8191
8192       Gamma...
8193
8194       Spiff
8195
8196       Dull
8197
8198       Equalize
8199
8200       Normalize
8201
8202       Negate
8203
8204       GRAYscale
8205
8206       Quantize...
8207
8208
8209       Effects
8210
8211
8212       Despeckle
8213
8214       Emboss
8215
8216       Reduce Noise
8217
8218       Add Noise
8219
8220       Sharpen...
8221
8222       Blur...
8223
8224       Threshold...
8225
8226       Edge Detect...
8227
8228       Spread...
8229
8230       Shade...
8231
8232       Raise...
8233
8234       Segment...
8235
8236
8237
8238
8239       F/X
8240
8241
8242       Solarize...
8243
8244       Swirl...
8245
8246       Implode...
8247
8248       Wave...
8249
8250       Oil Paint
8251
8252       Charcoal Draw...
8253
8254
8255
8256
8257       Miscellany
8258
8259
8260       Image Info
8261
8262       Zoom Image
8263
8264       Show Preview...
8265
8266       Show Histogram
8267
8268       Show Matte
8269
8270
8271       Help
8272
8273       Dismiss
8274
8275
8276       You  can  make  adjustments  to  the  region  of interest by moving the
8277       pointer to one of the rectangle corners, pressing a button,  and  drag‐
8278       ging.  Finally,  choose  an image processing technique from the Command
8279       widget. You can choose more than one image processing technique to  ap‐
8280       ply  to an area. Alternatively, you can move the region of interest be‐
8281       fore applying another image processing technique. To exit,  press  Dis‐
8282       miss.
8283

IMAGE PANNING

8285       When  an image exceeds the width or height of the X server screen, dis‐
8286       play maps a small panning icon. The rectangle within the  panning  icon
8287       shows  the area that is currently displayed in the the image window. To
8288       pan about the image, press any button and drag the pointer  within  the
8289       panning  icon.   The pan rectangle moves with the pointer and the image
8290       window is updated to reflect the location of the rectangle  within  the
8291       panning  icon. When you have selected the area of the image you wish to
8292       view, release the button.
8293
8294       Use the arrow keys to pan the image one pixel up, down, left, or  right
8295       within the image window.
8296
8297       The panning icon is withdrawn if the image becomes smaller than the di‐
8298       mensions of the X server screen.
8299

USER PREFERENCES

8301       Preferences affect the default behavior of display(1). The  preferences
8302       are either true or false and are stored in your home directory as .dis‐
8303       playrc:
8304
8305                display image centered on a backdrop"
8306
8307
8308                    This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and  is
8309                    useful  for  hiding  other X window activity while viewing
8310                    the image. The color of the backdrop is specified  as  the
8311                    background color. Refer to X Resources for details.
8312                confirm on program exit"
8313
8314
8315                    Ask  for a confirmation before exiting the display(1) pro‐
8316                    gram.
8317                correct image for display gamma"
8318
8319
8320                    If the image has a known gamma, the gamma is corrected  to
8321                    match  that  of  the  X  server  (see  the X Resource dis‐
8322                    playGamma).
8323                display warning messages"
8324
8325
8326                    Display any warning messages.
8327                apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to image"
8328
8329
8330                    The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity res‐
8331                    olution  for  spatial resolution by averaging the intensi‐
8332                    ties of several neighboring pixels.  Images  which  suffer
8333                    from  severe  contouring  when  reducing colors can be im‐
8334                    proved with this preference.
8335                use a shared colormap for colormapped X visuals"
8336
8337
8338                    This option only applies when the default X server  visual
8339                    is PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more de‐
8340                    tails. By default, a shared colormap is allocated. The im‐
8341                    age shares colors with other X clients.  Some image colors
8342                    could be approximated, therefore your image may look  very
8343                    different than intended. Otherwise the image colors appear
8344                    exactly as they are defined. However, other clients may go
8345                    technicolor when the image colormap is installed.
8346                display images as an X server pixmap"
8347
8348
8349                    Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this re‐
8350                    source to True to utilize a server  Pixmap  instead.  This
8351                    option  is  useful if your image exceeds the dimensions of
8352                    your server screen and you intend to pan the  image.  Pan‐
8353                    ning  is  much  faster  with  Pixmaps  than with a XImage.
8354                    Pixmaps are considered a precious resource, use them  with
8355                    discretion.
8356
8357
8358
8359       GM IDENTIFY
8360
8361              Identify describes the format and characteristics of one or more
8362              image files as internally supported by  the  software.  It  will
8363              also  report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.  The informa‐
8364              tion displayed includes the scene number,  the  file  name,  the
8365              width  and height of the image, whether the image is colormapped
8366              or not, the number of colors in the image, the number  of  bytes
8367              in the image, the format of the image (JPEG, PNM, etc.), and fi‐
8368              nally the number of seconds in both user time and  elapsed  time
8369              it took to read and process the image.  If -verbose or +ping are
8370              provided as an option, the pixel read rate is also displayed. An
8371              example line output from identify follows:
8372
8373                  images/aquarium.miff 640x480 PseudoClass 256c
8374                         308135b MIFF 0.000u 0:01
8375
8376              If -verbose is set, expect additional output including any image
8377              comment:
8378
8379
8380                  Image: images/aquarium.miff
8381                  class: PseudoClass
8382                  colors: 256
8383                  signature: eb5dca81dd93ae7e6ffae99a527eb5dca8...
8384                  matte: False
8385                  geometry: 640x480
8386                     depth: 8
8387                  bytes: 308135
8388                  format: MIFF
8389                  comments:
8390                  Imported from MTV raster image: aquarium.mtv
8391
8392              For some formats, additional format-specific  information  about
8393              the  file  will be written if the -debug coder or -debug all op‐
8394              tion is used.
8395

IDENTIFY OPTIONS

8397       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8398       the  command  line  remains in effect for the set of images immediately
8399       following, until the set is terminated by the appearance of any  option
8400       or -noop.
8401
8402       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8403
8404
8405       -authenticate <string>
8406              decrypt image with this password
8407
8408       -debug <events>
8409              enable debug printout
8410
8411       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8412              add coder/decoder specific options
8413
8414       -density <width>x<height>
8415              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8416
8417       -depth <value>
8418              depth of the image
8419
8420       -format <string>
8421              output formatted image characteristics
8422
8423       -help  print usage instructions
8424
8425       -interlace <type>
8426              the type of interlacing scheme
8427
8428       -limit <type> <value>
8429              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
8430              resource limit
8431
8432       -log <string>
8433              Specify format for debug log
8434
8435       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8436
8437       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8438              chroma subsampling factors
8439
8440       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
8441              width and height of the image
8442
8443       -verbose
8444              print detailed information about the image
8445
8446       -version
8447              print GraphicsMagick version string
8448
8449              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
8450              above.
8451
8452

GM IMPORT

8454       Import  reads  an image from any visible window on an X server and out‐
8455       puts it as an image file. You can capture a single window,  the  entire
8456       screen,  or any rectangular portion of the screen.  Use display for re‐
8457       display, printing, editing, formatting,  archiving,  image  processing,
8458       etc. of the captured image.
8459
8460       The  target  window can be specified by id, name, or may be selected by
8461       clicking the mouse in the desired window. If you  press  a  button  and
8462       then  drag,  a  rectangle  will form which expands and contracts as the
8463       mouse moves. To save the portion of the screen defined by  the  rectan‐
8464       gle, just release the button. The keyboard bell is rung once at the be‐
8465       ginning of the screen capture and twice when it completes.
8466

EXAMPLES

8468       To select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and  save
8469       it in the MIFF image format to a file entitled window.miff, use:
8470
8471           gm import window.miff
8472
8473       To  select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and save
8474       it in the Encapsulated PostScript format to include  in  another  docu‐
8475       ment, use:
8476
8477           gm import figure.eps
8478
8479       To  capture  the  entire  X server screen in the JPEG image format in a
8480       file entitled root.jpeg, without using the mouse, use:
8481
8482           gm import -window root root.jpeg
8483
8484       To capture the 512x256 area at the upper right corner of the  X  server
8485       screen  in the PNG image format in a well-compressed file entitled cor‐
8486       ner.png, without using the mouse,  use:
8487
8488           gm import -window root -crop 512x256-0+0 -quality 90
8489                  corner.png
8490

OPTIONS

8492       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8493       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
8494       specifying the option again with a different effect.
8495
8496       Import options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resources
8497       file.  See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values specified
8498       in your X resources file.
8499
8500       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8501
8502
8503       -bordercolor <color>
8504              the border color
8505
8506       -colors <value>
8507              preferred number of colors in the image
8508
8509       -colorspace <value>
8510              the type of colorspace
8511
8512       -comment <string>
8513              annotate an image with a comment
8514
8515       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8516              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8517
8518       -debug <events>
8519              enable debug printout
8520
8521       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8522              add coder/decoder specific options
8523
8524       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8525              display the next image after pausing
8526
8527       -density <width>x<height>
8528              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8529
8530       -depth <value>
8531              depth of the image
8532
8533       -descend
8534              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
8535
8536       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8537              specifies the X server to contact
8538
8539       -dispose <method>
8540              GIF disposal method
8541
8542       -dither
8543              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8544
8545       -encoding <type>
8546              specify the text encoding
8547
8548       -endian <type>
8549              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8550
8551       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
8552
8553       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8554              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8555
8556       -help  print usage instructions
8557
8558       -interlace <type>
8559              the type of interlacing scheme
8560
8561       -label <name>
8562              assign a label to an image
8563
8564       -limit <type> <value>
8565              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
8566              resource limit
8567
8568       -log <string>
8569              Specify format for debug log
8570
8571       -monitor
8572              show progress indication
8573
8574       -monochrome
8575              transform the image to black and white
8576
8577       -negate
8578              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8579
8580       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8581              size and location of an image canvas
8582
8583       -pause <seconds>
8584              pause between snapshots [import]
8585
8586       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8587
8588       -pointsize <value>
8589              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8590
8591       -quality <value>
8592              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8593
8594       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8595              resize an image
8596
8597       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8598              rotate the image
8599
8600       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8601              chroma subsampling factors
8602
8603       -scene <value>
8604              set scene number
8605
8606       -screen
8607              specify the screen to capture
8608
8609       -set <attribute> <value>
8610              set an image attribute
8611
8612       +set <attribute>
8613              unset an image attribute
8614
8615       -silent
8616              operate silently
8617
8618       -snaps <value>
8619              number of screen snapshots
8620
8621       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8622              resize an image (quickly)
8623
8624       -transparent <color>
8625              make this color transparent within the image
8626
8627       -trim  trim an image
8628
8629       -verbose
8630              print detailed information about the image
8631
8632       -version
8633              print GraphicsMagick version string
8634
8635              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
8636              above.
8637
8638

GM MOGRIFY

8640       Mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
8641       include  image  scaling,  image  rotation, color reduction, and others.
8642       Each transmogrified image overwrites the corresponding original  image,
8643       unless  an option such as -format causes the output filename to be dif‐
8644       ferent from the input filename.
8645
8646       The graphics formats supported by mogrify are  listed  in  GraphicsMag‐
8647       ick(1).
8648

EXAMPLES

8650       To convert all the TIFF files in a particular directory to JPEG, use:
8651
8652           gm mogrify -format jpeg *.tiff
8653
8654       To convert a directory full of JPEG images to thumbnails, use:
8655
8656           gm mogrify -size 120x120 *.jpg -resize 120x120 +profile "*"
8657
8658       In  this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder that
8659       the images are going to be downscaled to 120x120, allowing  it  to  run
8660       faster  by  avoiding returning full-resolution images to GraphicsMagick
8661       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
8662       the  desired dimensions of the output images.  It will be scaled so its
8663       largest dimension is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes  any  ICM,
8664       EXIF,  IPTC,  or  other profiles that might be present in the input and
8665       aren't needed in the thumbnails.
8666
8667       To scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and  480
8668       pixels in height, use:
8669
8670           gm mogrify -resize 640x480! cockatoo.miff
8671

OPTIONS

8673       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8674       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
8675       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
8676
8677       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8678
8679
8680       -affine <matrix>
8681              drawing transform matrix
8682
8683       -antialias
8684              remove pixel aliasing
8685
8686       -asc-cdl <spec>
8687              apply ASC CDL color transform
8688
8689       -authenticate <string>
8690              decrypt image with this password
8691
8692       -auto-orient
8693              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
8694
8695       -background <color>
8696              the background color
8697
8698       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
8699              pixels below the threshold become black
8700
8701       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
8702              blue chromaticity primary point
8703
8704       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
8705              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8706
8707       -border <width>x<height>
8708              surround the image with a border of color
8709
8710       -bordercolor <color>
8711              the border color
8712
8713       -channel <type>
8714              the type of channel
8715
8716       -charcoal <factor>
8717              simulate a charcoal drawing
8718
8719       -colorize <value>
8720              colorize the image with the pen color
8721
8722       -colors <value>
8723              preferred number of colors in the image
8724
8725       -colorspace <value>
8726              the type of colorspace
8727
8728       -comment <string>
8729              annotate an image with a comment
8730
8731       -compose <operator>
8732              the type of image composition
8733
8734       -compress <type>
8735              the type of image compression
8736
8737       -contrast
8738              enhance or reduce the image contrast
8739
8740       -convolve <kernel>
8741              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
8742
8743       -create-directories
8744              create output directory if required
8745
8746       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8747              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8748
8749       -cycle <amount>
8750              displace image colormap by amount
8751
8752       -debug <events>
8753              enable debug printout
8754
8755       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8756              add coder/decoder specific options
8757
8758       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8759              display the next image after pausing
8760
8761       -density <width>x<height>
8762              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8763
8764       -depth <value>
8765              depth of the image
8766
8767       -despeckle
8768              reduce the speckles within an image
8769
8770       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8771              specifies the X server to contact
8772
8773       -dispose <method>
8774              GIF disposal method
8775
8776       -dither
8777              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8778
8779       -draw <string>
8780              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
8781
8782       -edge <radius>
8783              detect edges within an image
8784
8785       -emboss <radius>
8786              emboss an image
8787
8788       -encoding <type>
8789              specify the text encoding
8790
8791       -endian <type>
8792              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8793
8794       -enhance
8795              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
8796
8797       -equalize
8798              perform histogram equalization to the image
8799
8800       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8801              composite image on background color canvas image
8802
8803       -fill <color>
8804              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
8805
8806       -filter <type>
8807              use this type of filter when resizing an image
8808
8809       -flip  create a "mirror image"
8810
8811       -flop  create a "mirror image"
8812
8813       -font <name>
8814              use this font when annotating the image with text
8815
8816       -format <type>
8817              the image format type
8818
8819       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
8820              surround the image with an ornamental border
8821
8822       -fuzz <distance>{%}
8823              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
8824
8825       -gamma <value>
8826              level of gamma correction
8827
8828       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
8829              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8830
8831       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8832              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8833
8834       -gravity <type>
8835              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
8836
8837       -green-primary <x>,<y>
8838              green chromaticity primary point
8839
8840       -hald-clut <clut>
8841              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
8842
8843       -help  print usage instructions
8844
8845       -implode <factor>
8846              implode image pixels about the center
8847
8848       -interlace <type>
8849              the type of interlacing scheme
8850
8851       -label <name>
8852              assign a label to an image
8853
8854       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
8855              perform local adaptive thresholding
8856
8857       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
8858              adjust the level of image contrast
8859
8860       -limit <type> <value>
8861              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
8862              resource limit
8863
8864       -linewidth
8865              the line width for subsequent draw operations
8866
8867       -list <type>
8868              the type of list
8869
8870       -log <string>
8871              Specify format for debug log
8872
8873       -loop <iterations>
8874              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
8875
8876       -magnify
8877              magnify the image
8878
8879       -map <filename>
8880              choose a particular set of colors from this image
8881
8882       -mask <filename>
8883              Specify a clipping mask
8884
8885       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
8886
8887       -mattecolor <color>
8888              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
8889
8890       -median <radius>
8891              apply a median filter to the image
8892
8893       -minify <factor>
8894              minify the image
8895
8896       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
8897              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
8898
8899       -monitor
8900              show progress indication
8901
8902       -monochrome
8903              transform the image to black and white
8904
8905       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
8906              Simulate motion blur
8907
8908       -negate
8909              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8910
8911       -noise <radius|type>
8912              add or reduce noise in an image
8913
8914       -noop  NOOP (no option)
8915
8916       -normalize
8917              transform image to span the full range of color values
8918
8919       -opaque <color>
8920              change this color to the pen color within the image
8921
8922       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
8923              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
8924              channel
8925
8926       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
8927              ordered dither the image
8928
8929       -output-directory <directory>
8930              output files to directory
8931
8932       -orient <orientation>
8933              Set the image orientation attribute
8934
8935       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8936              size and location of an image canvas
8937
8938       -paint <radius>
8939              simulate an oil painting
8940
8941       -pen <color>
8942              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
8943
8944       -pointsize <value>
8945              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8946
8947       -profile <filename>
8948              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
8949
8950       -preserve-timestamp
8951              preserve the original timestamps of the file
8952
8953       -quality <value>
8954              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8955
8956       -raise <width>x<height>
8957              lighten or darken image edges
8958
8959       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
8960              random threshold the image
8961
8962       -recolor <matrix>
8963              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
8964
8965       -red-primary <x>,<y>
8966              red chromaticity primary point
8967
8968       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8969              apply options to a portion of the image
8970
8971       -render
8972              render vector operations
8973
8974       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
8975              Adjust image page offsets
8976
8977       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
8978              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
8979
8980       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8981              resize an image
8982
8983       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8984              roll an image vertically or horizontally
8985
8986       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8987              rotate the image
8988
8989       -sample <geometry>
8990              scale image using pixel sampling
8991
8992       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8993              chroma subsampling factors
8994
8995       -scale <geometry>
8996              scale the image.
8997
8998       -scene <value>
8999              set scene number
9000
9001       -set <attribute> <value>
9002              set an image attribute
9003
9004       +set <attribute>
9005              unset an image attribute
9006
9007       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
9008              segment an image
9009
9010       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
9011              shade the image using a distant light source
9012
9013       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9014              sharpen the image
9015
9016       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
9017              shave pixels from the image edges
9018
9019       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
9020              shear the image along the X or Y axis
9021
9022       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9023              width and height of the image
9024
9025       -solarize <factor>
9026              negate all pixels above the threshold level
9027
9028       -spread <amount>
9029              displace image pixels by a random amount
9030
9031       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9032
9033       -stroke <color>
9034              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9035
9036       -strokewidth <value>
9037              set the stroke width
9038
9039       -swirl <degrees>
9040              swirl image pixels about the center
9041
9042       -texture <filename>
9043              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9044
9045       -threshold <value>{%}
9046              threshold the image
9047
9048       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9049              resize an image (quickly)
9050
9051       -tile <filename>
9052              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
9053
9054       -transform
9055              transform the image
9056
9057       -transparent <color>
9058              make this color transparent within the image
9059
9060       -treedepth <value>
9061              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9062
9063       -trim  trim an image
9064
9065       -type <type>
9066              the image type
9067
9068       -units <type>
9069              the units of image resolution
9070
9071       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
9072              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
9073
9074       -verbose
9075              print detailed information about the image
9076
9077       -version
9078              print GraphicsMagick version string
9079
9080       -view <string>
9081              FlashPix viewing parameters
9082
9083       -virtual-pixel <method>
9084              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
9085
9086       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
9087              alter an image along a sine wave
9088
9089       -white-point <x>,<y>
9090              chromaticity white point
9091
9092       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
9093              pixels above the threshold become white
9094
9095              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
9096              above.
9097
9098

GM MONTAGE

9100       montage creates a composite image by combining several separate images.
9101       The  images are tiled on the composite image with the name of the image
9102       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
9103
9104       The composite image is constructed in the following manner. First, each
9105       image  specified on the command line, except for the last, is scaled to
9106       fit the maximum tile size. The maximum tile size by default is 120x120.
9107       It  can  be  modified with the -geometry command line argument or X re‐
9108       source. See Options for more information on command line arguments. See
9109       X(1)  for  more information on X resources.  Note that the maximum tile
9110       size need not be a square.
9111
9112       Next the composite image is initialized with the color specified by the
9113       -background  command  line argument or X resource. The width and height
9114       of the composite image is determined by the title specified, the  maxi‐
9115       mum  tile  size, the number of tiles per row, the tile border width and
9116       height, the image border width, and the label  height.  The  number  of
9117       tiles  per  row  specifies how many images are to appear in each row of
9118       the composite image. The default is to have 5 tiles in each row  and  4
9119       tiles  in  each column of the composite.  A specific value is specified
9120       with -tile. The tile border width and  height,  and  the  image  border
9121       width  defaults  to the value of the X resource -borderwidth. It can be
9122       changed with the -borderwidth or -geometry command line argument  or  X
9123       resource.  The  label height is determined by the font you specify with
9124       the -font command line argument or X resource. If you do not specify  a
9125       font,  a  font  is  chosen that allows the name of the image to fit the
9126       maximum width of a tiled area.  The label colors is determined  by  the
9127       -background  and  -fill command line argument or X resource. Note, that
9128       if the background and pen colors are the same, labels will not appear.
9129
9130       Initially, the composite image title is placed at the  top  if  one  is
9131       specified  (refer to -fill). Next, each image is set onto the composite
9132       image, surrounded by its border color, with its name centered just  be‐
9133       low  it.  The  individual images are left-justified within the width of
9134       the tiled area.  The order of the images is the same as they appear  on
9135       the  command  line  unless  the images have a scene keyword. If a scene
9136       number is specified in each image, then the images are tiled  onto  the
9137       composite  in  the order of their scene number. Finally, the last argu‐
9138       ment on the command line is the name assigned to the  composite  image.
9139       By  default,  the image is written in the MIFF format and can be viewed
9140       or printed with display(1).
9141
9142
9143       Note, that if the number of tiles exceeds the default number of  20  (5
9144       per  row,  4  per column), more than one composite image is created. To
9145       ensure a single image is produced, use -tile to increase the number  of
9146       tiles to meet or exceed the number of input images.
9147
9148       Finally,  to  create one or more empty spaces in the sequence of tiles,
9149       use the "NULL:" image format.
9150
9151       Note, a composite MIFF image displayed to an X server with display  be‐
9152       haves  differently than other images. You can think of the composite as
9153       a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of the composite and
9154       press a button to display it. See display(1) and miff(5)
9155

EXAMPLES

9157       To  create  a  montage  of  a cockatoo, a parrot, and a hummingbird and
9158       write it to a file called birds, use:
9159
9160           gm montage cockatoo.miff parrot.miff hummingbird.miff
9161                   birds.miff
9162
9163       To tile several bird images so that they are  at  most  256  pixels  in
9164       width  and  192 pixels in height, surrounded by a red border, and sepa‐
9165       rated by 10 pixels of background color, use:
9166
9167           gm montage -geometry 256x192+10+10 -bordercolor red
9168                   birds.* montage.miff
9169
9170       To create an unlabeled parrot image, 640 by 480 pixels, and  surrounded
9171       by a border of black, use:
9172
9173           gm montage -geometry 640x480 -bordercolor black
9174                   -label "" parrot.miff bird.miff
9175
9176       To create an image of an eagle with a textured background, use:
9177
9178           gm montage -texture bumps.jpg eagle.jpg eagle.png
9179
9180       To  join  several  GIF  images together without any extraneous graphics
9181       (e.g.  no label, no shadowing, no surrounding tile frame), use:
9182
9183           gm montage +frame +shadow +label -tile 5x1
9184                   -geometry 50x50+0+0 *.png joined.png
9185

OPTIONS

9187       Any option you specify on the command line remains in  effect  for  the
9188       group  of images following it, until the group is terminated by the ap‐
9189       pearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to  make  a  montage  of
9190       three  images,  the  first with 32 colors, the second with an unlimited
9191       number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
9192
9193
9194           gm montage -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
9195                    -colors 16 cockatoo.3 cockatoos.miff
9196
9197       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
9198
9199
9200       -adjoin
9201              join images into a single multi-image file
9202
9203       -affine <matrix>
9204              drawing transform matrix
9205
9206       -authenticate <string>
9207              decrypt image with this password
9208
9209       -background <color>
9210              the background color
9211
9212       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
9213              blue chromaticity primary point
9214
9215       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
9216              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
9217
9218       -bordercolor <color>
9219              the border color
9220
9221       -borderwidth <geometry>
9222              the border width
9223
9224       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9225              remove pixels from the interior of an image
9226
9227       -colors <value>
9228              preferred number of colors in the image
9229
9230       -colorspace <value>
9231              the type of colorspace
9232
9233       -comment <string>
9234              annotate an image with a comment
9235
9236       -compose <operator>
9237              the type of image composition
9238
9239       -compress <type>
9240              the type of image compression
9241
9242       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9243              preferred size and location of the cropped image
9244
9245       -debug <events>
9246              enable debug printout
9247
9248       -define <key>{=<value>},...
9249              add coder/decoder specific options
9250
9251       -density <width>x<height>
9252              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
9253
9254       -depth <value>
9255              depth of the image
9256
9257       -display <host:display[.screen]>
9258              specifies the X server to contact
9259
9260       -dispose <method>
9261              GIF disposal method
9262
9263       -dither
9264              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
9265
9266       -draw <string>
9267              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
9268
9269       -encoding <type>
9270              specify the text encoding
9271
9272       -endian <type>
9273              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
9274
9275       -fill <color>
9276              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
9277
9278       -filter <type>
9279              use this type of filter when resizing an image
9280
9281       -font <name>
9282              use this font when annotating the image with text
9283
9284       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
9285              surround the image with an ornamental border
9286
9287       -gamma <value>
9288              level of gamma correction
9289
9290       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
9291              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
9292
9293       -gravity <type>
9294              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
9295
9296       -green-primary <x>,<y>
9297              green chromaticity primary point
9298
9299       -help  print usage instructions
9300
9301       -interlace <type>
9302              the type of interlacing scheme
9303
9304       -label <name>
9305              assign a label to an image
9306
9307       -limit <type> <value>
9308              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
9309              resource limit
9310
9311       -log <string>
9312              Specify format for debug log
9313
9314       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
9315
9316       -mattecolor <color>
9317              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
9318
9319       -mode <value>
9320              mode of operation
9321
9322       -monitor
9323              show progress indication
9324
9325       -monochrome
9326              transform the image to black and white
9327
9328       -noop  NOOP (no option)
9329
9330       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9331              size and location of an image canvas
9332
9333       -pen <color>
9334              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9335
9336       -pointsize <value>
9337              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9338
9339       -quality <value>
9340              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9341
9342       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9343              red chromaticity primary point
9344
9345       -render
9346              render vector operations
9347
9348       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9349              Adjust image page offsets
9350
9351       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9352              resize an image
9353
9354       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9355              rotate the image
9356
9357       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9358              chroma subsampling factors
9359
9360       -scenes <value-value>
9361              range of image scene numbers to read
9362
9363       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
9364              shadow the montage
9365
9366       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9367              sharpen the image
9368
9369       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9370              width and height of the image
9371
9372       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9373
9374       -stroke <color>
9375              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9376
9377       -strokewidth <value>
9378              set the stroke width
9379
9380       -texture <filename>
9381              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9382
9383       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9384              resize an image (quickly)
9385
9386       -tile <geometry>
9387              layout of images [montage]
9388
9389       -title <string>
9390              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
9391
9392       -transform
9393              transform the image
9394
9395       -transparent <color>
9396              make this color transparent within the image
9397
9398       -treedepth <value>
9399              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9400
9401       -trim  trim an image
9402
9403       -type <type>
9404              the image type
9405
9406       -verbose
9407              print detailed information about the image
9408
9409       -version
9410              print GraphicsMagick version string
9411
9412       -white-point <x>,<y>
9413              chromaticity white point
9414
9415              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
9416              above.
9417
9418

X RESOURCES

9420       Montage options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
9421       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
9422       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
9423
9424       All montage options have a corresponding X resource. In addition,  mon‐
9425       tage uses the following X resources:
9426
9427       background (class Background)
9428              background color
9429
9430              Specifies  the  preferred  color  to use for the composite image
9431              background.  The default is #ccc.
9432
9433       borderColor (class BorderColor)
9434              border color
9435
9436              Specifies the preferred color to use  for  the  composite  image
9437              border. The default is #ccc.
9438
9439       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
9440              border width
9441
9442              Specifies the width in pixels of the composite image border. The
9443              default is 2.
9444
9445       font (class Font)
9446              font to use
9447
9448              Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when  displaying
9449              text  within the composite image. The default is 9x15, fixed, or
9450              5x8 determined by the composite image size.
9451
9452       matteColor (class MatteColor)
9453              color of the frame
9454
9455              Specify the color of an image frame. A 3D effect is achieved  by
9456              using  highlight  and shadow colors derived from this color. The
9457              default value is #697B8F.
9458
9459       pen (class Pen)
9460              text color
9461
9462              Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the compos‐
9463              ite image.  The default is black.
9464
9465       title (class Title)
9466              composite image title
9467
9468              This resource specifies the title to be placed at the top of the
9469              composite image. The default is not to place a title at the  top
9470              of the composite image.
9471

GM TIME

DESCRIPTION

9474       time  executes  an  arbitrary gm utility command (e.g. convert) and re‐
9475       ports the user and elapsed time.  This provides way to measure  command
9476       execution  times  similar  to the Unix ´time' command but in a portable
9477       and consistent way.
9478

EXAMPLES

9480       To obtain time information for the execution of a command:
9481
9482       % gm time convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
9483       convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm    22.60s user 0.00s system 2354% cpu 0.960 total
9484       Here is the interpretation of the above output:
9485
9486           user - the total user time consumed.
9487           system - the total system time consumed.
9488           total - the total elapsed time consumed.
9489
9490

OPTIONS

9492       The time command reqires no options other than the gm command  to  exe‐
9493       cute.
9494

GM VERSION

DESCRIPTION

9497       version  displays  the  software  release version, build quantum (pixel
9498       sample) depth, web site URL, copyright notice,  enabled  features  sup‐
9499       port,  configuration  parameters, and final build options used to build
9500       the software.  The available information depends on  how  the  software
9501       was configured and the host system.
9502

EXAMPLES

9504       To display the version information:
9505
9506         GraphicsMagick 1.3.37 2021-12-12 Q16 http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/
9507         Copyright (C) 2002-2021 GraphicsMagick Group.
9508         Additional copyrights and licenses apply to this software.
9509         See http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/www/Copyright.html for details.
9510         Feature Support:
9511           Native Thread Safe         yes
9512           Large Files (> 32 bit)     yes
9513           Large Memory (> 32 bit)    yes
9514           BZIP                       yes
9515           DPS                        no
9516           FlashPix                   no
9517           FreeType                   yes
9518           Ghostscript (Library)      no
9519           JBIG                       yes
9520           JPEG-2000                  yes
9521           JPEG                       yes
9522           Little CMS                 yes
9523           Loadable Modules           no
9524           Solaris mtmalloc           no
9525           Google perftools tcmalloc  no
9526           OpenMP                     yes (201511 "4.5")
9527           PNG                        yes
9528           TIFF                       yes
9529           TRIO                       no
9530           Solaris umem               no
9531           WebP                       yes
9532           WMF                        yes
9533           X11                        yes
9534           XML                        yes
9535           ZLIB                       yes
9536         Host type: x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu
9537         Configured using the command:
9538           ./configure  ...
9539         Final Build Parameters:
9540           CC       = ...
9541           CFLAGS   = ...
9542           CPPFLAGS = ...
9543           CXX      = ...
9544           CXXFLAGS = ...
9545           LDFLAGS  = ...
9546           LIBS     = ...
9547

OPTIONS

9549       The version command does not currently support any options.
9550
9551
9552
9553GraphicsMagick                    2022/05/02                             gm(1)
Impressum